2007 chevrolet monte carlo owner manual m€¦ · 2007 chevrolet monte carlo owner manual m 1...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 18Child Restraints ...................................... 41Airbag System ........................................ 68Restraint System Check ......................... 84

Features and Controls ................................ 87Keys ....................................................... 89Doors and Locks .................................... 98Windows ............................................... 103Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 105Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 108Mirrors .................................................. 123

OnStar® System ................................... 125Universal Home Remote System .......... 129Storage Areas ...................................... 140Sunroof ................................................ 141

Instrument Panel ....................................... 143Instrument Panel Overview ................... 146Climate Controls ................................... 164Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators .... 170Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 186Audio System(s) ................................... 210

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 245Your Driving, the Road, and Your

Vehicle .............................................. 246Towing ................................................. 282

2007 Chevrolet Monte Carlo Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 293Service ................................................. 296Fuel ...................................................... 298Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 306Headlamp Aiming ................................. 342Bulb Replacement ................................ 342Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 347Tires ..................................................... 349Appearance Care .................................. 385Vehicle Identification ............................. 394

Electrical System .................................. 395Capacities and Specifications ................ 400

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 403Maintenance Schedule .......................... 404

Customer Assistance Information ............. 421Customer Assistance and Information ..... 422Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 440

Index .......................................................... 443

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thename MONTE CARLO are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information atthe time it was printed. We reserve the rightto make changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appearsin this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15863015 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Passenger Seat ................................ 8Power Seat ................................................... 8Manual Lumbar ............................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 13Seatback Latches ........................................ 14Easy Entry Seat .......................................... 15

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 18Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 23How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 24Driver Position ............................................. 24Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32Right Front Passenger Position ................... 33Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 33Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 36Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 40Safety Belt Extender ................................... 40

Child Restraints ............................................ 41Older Children ............................................. 41Infants and Young Children ......................... 44

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 47Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 51Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 53Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 60Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 63Airbag System .............................................. 68

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 71When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 75How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 75What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 76Passenger Sensing System ......................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 82Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 83Restraint System Check ............................... 84

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 85

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Passenger Seat

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

Power Seat

Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar,Power Seat Control and Manual Recline shown

8

Your vehicle has a power driver’s seat. Thecontrol is located on the outboard side of theseat cushion. To adjust the seat, do any of thefollowing:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the controlup or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the controlup or down.

Manual Lumbar

The driver’s seat has manual lumbar. The leveris located on the outboard side of the seat nearthe front of the seat cushion. Lift up on thelever repeatedly to increase lumbar support.Push down on the lever repeatedly to decreaselumbar support.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar,Power Seat Control, and Manual Recline shown

9

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the buttons thatcontrol temperature forthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s seats arelocated on the climatecontrol panel. SeeClimate Control Systemon page 164.

Press the button once to warm the seat to a hightemperature. Both lights below the heated seatsymbol will come on. Press the button asecond time to reduce the seat to a lowertemperature. The bottom light will be lit. Pressthe button a third time to turn the heated seat off.

The heated seat feature will need to be turnedon each time the ignition is turned off and backon again.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

10

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located onthe outboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.2. Move the seatback to the desired position,

then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressureto the seatback and the seatback will returnto the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sureit is locked.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Lumbar,Power Seat Control, and Manual Recline shown

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint upto raise it. To lower thehead restraint, press thebutton, located on thetop of the seatback, andpush the restraint down.

13

Seatback Latches

There is a lever located on the back of both frontseats near the top on the outboard side.

These are used to fold the seatbacks forwardfor easy entry and exit of the rear seats. Thefront passenger’s seat has an easy entry featurewhich allows the entire seat to move forward.See Easy Entry Seat on page 15.

To fold the seatback forward, lift the lever andpush the seatback forward.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the upright position,push the seatback rearward until it locks in place.Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Passenger’s Seat shown, Driver’s Seat similar

14

Easy Entry SeatThe front passenger seat is designed to make iteasy to get into and out of the rear seat.

1. Lift the lever on the back of the right frontseat and tilt the seatback forward.

2. Push on the seatback to slide the seatforward. The seat is now in the positionfor easy entry/exit.

3. Return the seatback to the upright position tolock it. Slide the seat fully rearward to lock itinto its original position.

4. Make sure the safety belt is routed correctlythrough the front safety belt guide.

15

{CAUTION:

If the easy entry right front seat is notlocked, it can move. In a sudden stop orcrash, the person sitting there could beinjured. After you have used it, be sure topush rearward on an easy entry seat to besure it is locked.

5. Try to slide the entire seat back and forth tomake sure the seat is locked into place.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatYou can fold either side of the seatback down formore cargo space. Make sure the front seat isnot reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not folddown all the way.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To lower the rearseatback, pull forwardon the seat tablocated on the outboardside of the seatbackcushion and foldthe seatback down.This will allowyou direct accessto the trunk.

16

To raise the rear seatback, follow these steps:1. Raise the seatback up and make sure

it latches.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure itis locked in position.

3. Ensure that the safety belts are properlystowed over the seatback in all threepositions.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

When the seat is not in use, it should be kept inthe upright locked position.

17

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

18

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 173 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 173.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

19

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

20

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

21

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

22

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not insteadof them. Every airbag system ever offered forsale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

23

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 41 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 44. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is howto wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

If the safety belt is not routed through theguide on the head restraint, slide the edge ofthe belt webbing through the opening onthe guide. Be sure the belt is not twisted.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

24

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 40.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

25

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

26

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

27


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

28


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

29


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

30


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

31

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt isout of the way. If you slam the door on it, youcan damage both the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

32

The best way to protect the fetus is to protectthe mother. When a safety belt is worn properly,it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 24.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens,let the belt go back all the way and start again.

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others in the vehicle whoare wearing safety belts.

33

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 40.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

34

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

35

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

36

There is one guide for each outside passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install acomfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

37

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection neededin a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

38

4. Buckle, position, and release the safetybelt as described in Rear Seat Passengerson page 33. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upwardto expose its storage clip, and then slide the guideonto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand in between the seatback and interior body,leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.

39

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 85.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for the seat it ismade to fit. The extender has been designedfor adults. Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.For more information see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

40

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

41

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 36. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

42

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

43

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

44

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint systemcan provide.

45

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed acrossthe strongest part of an infant’s body,the back and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

46

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still sosmall that the vehicle’s regular safety beltmay not remain low on the hip bones, asit should. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

47

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back ofthe infant. The harness system holds theinfant in place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

48

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat canalso help a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system isa portable one, which is purchased bythe vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,an add-on child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. With built-in or add-onchild restraints, the child has to be securedwithin the child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint,be sure the child restraint is designed tobe used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

49

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Makesure the child restraint is properlyinstalled in the vehicle using the vehicle’ssafety belt or LATCH system, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 53 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

50

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

51

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag orairbags are off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCHsystem holds a child restraint during driving orin a crash. This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier. The LATCHsystem uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH systemMake sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint equipped with LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturerwill provide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint withthese attachments in your vehicle.

Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tetheranchors. Your child restraint may have lowerattachments and a top tether.Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

53

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some top tether-equipped child restraints aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the lawrequires that forward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether be attached.In the United States, some child restraints alsohave a top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

54

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, eachseating position with lower anchors has two labels,near the crease between the seatback and the seatcushion, showing where the anchors are located.Rear Seat

55

The top tether anchors are located on the rearseatback filler panel. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 51 for additional information.

56

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

57

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint hasbeen installed. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

58

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest and youare using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest and youare using a dual tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a single tether,route the tether over thehead restraint.

59

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 53.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

60

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

61

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 53.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

62

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a saferplace to secure a forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint on page 51.

In addition, your vehicle has the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped)when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 77 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 175 for more informationon this including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat, if the airbags deploy.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and side airbag(if equipped), if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no systemis fail-safe, and no one can guaranteethat an airbag or airbags will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. General Motorsrecommends that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag or airbags are off.

63

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualPassenger Seat on page 8 or Power Seaton page 8.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 53.

There is no top tether anchor in the right frontpassenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat inthis position if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 53 if the childrestraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has airbags. See PassengerSensing System on page 77. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin a rear seat, even if the airbag or airbags areoff. If your child restraint is forward-facing,move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the child restraint in this seat.See Manual Passenger Seat on page 8 orPower Seat on page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and side impact airbag (if equipped), theoff indicator in the passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay lit when you turnthe ignition to RUN or START. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 175.

64

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Remove the safety belt from the guide on thehead restraint by sliding the webbing throughthe opening on the guide. Do not securethe child restraint with the safety belt routedthrough the guide.

4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

65

6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

7. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

66


9. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicatoron the overhead console will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Insert the safety belt into the guide on the headrestraint by sliding the webbing through theopening on the guide.

67

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags.Side impact airbags are available for the driver andright front passenger.

If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for thedriver and the right front passenger, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on theside of the seatback closest to the door.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.


68


Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deployin moderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflatein frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Front occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door.

69

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag systemis designed for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 41 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 44.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 174 for more information.

70

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

71

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impactairbag is in the side of the driver’s seatbackclosest to the door.

If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’sside impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’sseatback closest to the door.

72

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag,and do not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. Do not let seatcovers block the inflation path of a sideimpact airbag.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

73

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into awall that does not move or deform, the thresholdlevel for the reduced deployment is about12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h), and the thresholdlevel for a full deployment is about 18 to 22 mph(29 to 35.4 km/h). The threshold level canvary, however, with specific vehicle design, so thatit can be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 68.Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed threshold level. The thresholdlevel can vary with specific vehicle design.Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate infrontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers, orrear impacts. Both side impact airbags will deploywhen either side of the vehicle is struck unlessthe passenger sensing system has turned off thepassenger’s side impact airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 77 for more information.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, theangle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts.For side impact airbags, inflation is determined bythe location and severity of the impact.

74

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, the airbag and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modules.Frontal airbag modules are located insidethe steering wheel and instrument panel.For seating positions with side impact airbags,there are also airbag modules in the side ofthe seatbacks closest to the door.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided bysafety belts. Airbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

75

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize theairbag inflated. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, and forseating positions with side impact airbags, the sideof the seatback closest to the door — may behot for a short time. The parts of the airbag thatcome into contact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may be some smokeand dust coming from the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driverfrom seeing out of the windshield or being ableto steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

76

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After they inflate, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be thereto help protect you in another crash. A newsystem will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manual foryour vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collectionand Event Data Recorders on page 434.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theoverhead console will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to RUN or START. The wordsON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, willbe visible during the system check.

If you use remote start to start your vehicle froma distance, if your vehicle has this feature,you may not see the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either the word ONor the word OFF, or the symbol for on or thesymbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 175.

United States Canada

77

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s airbag or airbagsshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbags deploy.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag orairbags are off.


78


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andside impact airbag (if equipped) if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weightoff of the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s airbag or airbags, the offindicator in the overhead console will light and staylit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint following the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 63.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

79

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sairbag or airbags anytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properly in the rightfront passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag or airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag or airbags are active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s airbag or airbags,depending upon the person’s seating posture andbody build. Everyone in your vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off

and ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag or airbags.

80

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of an airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 174 for moreon this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system. SeeAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 83.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

81

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchasea service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 441.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

82

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Service before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 422.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, the overhead console, orairbag wiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 422.

83

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 388.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If abelt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,and have them repaired or replaced. The airbagsystem does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, or an airbag covering (if equipped) ona seatback, the airbag may not work properly.You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag, or both theairbag module and the seatback for seatingpositions with a side impact airbag(if equipped.) Do not open or break theairbag coverings.

84

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systems areworking properly after a crash, havethem inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 174.

85

✍ NOTES

86

Keys .............................................................. 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 90Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................... 91Doors and Locks .......................................... 98

Door Locks ................................................. 98Power Door Locks ....................................... 99Automatic Door Lock ................................. 100Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 100Lockout Protection ..................................... 100Trunk ........................................................ 101

Windows ...................................................... 103Power Windows ........................................ 104Sun Visors ................................................ 104

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 105Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 105PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 106PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 107

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 108New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 108Ignition Positions ....................................... 109

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 110Starting the Engine .................................... 110Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 112Active Fuel Management™

(5.3L V8 Engine) .................................... 113Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 113Parking Brake ........................................... 117Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 120Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 120Engine Exhaust ......................................... 121Running the Engine While Parked ............. 122

Mirrors ......................................................... 123Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 123Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® .......... 123Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® .......................................... 123Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 124Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 124Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 124

Section 2 Features and Controls

87

OnStar® System .......................................... 125Universal Home Remote System ................ 129

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED) ....................... 129

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 130

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED) .......... 131

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With one triangular LED) ....... 136

Storage Areas ............................................. 140Glove Box ................................................. 140Cupholder(s) .............................................. 140Center Console Storage Area .................... 140Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 140Convenience Net ....................................... 141

Sunroof ....................................................... 141

Section 2 Features and Controls

88

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

89

One key is used forthe ignition and thedriver’s door.

If you need a new key, contact your dealer forassistance. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 428 for more information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemThe remote keyless entry system operates on aradio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

• This device may not cause interference.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

• This device may not cause interference.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

90

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any remote keyless entry system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 91.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be unlatched from about3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with theremote keyless entry transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature youcan also start your vehicle with the remote keylessentry transmitter. Your remote keyless entrytransmitter, with the remote start button, providesan increased range of 195 feet (60 m) away.However, the range may be less while the vehicleis running. As a result, you may need to becloser to your vehicle to turn it off than you wereto turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 90.

91

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, it may be started from outsidethe vehicle using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” followingfor more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash onceto indicate locking has occurred. If enabled throughthe DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock buttonis pressed again within five seconds of theprevious press of the lock button. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 203 for additionalinformation. Pressing the lock button may arm thecontent theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 105.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlockthe driver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. Ifenabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred. SeeDIC Vehicle Customization on page 203. Pressingthe unlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 105.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

92

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and holdthis button for about one second to release thetrunk lid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P) forthis feature to operate.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm.The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarmwill turn off when the ignition is turned to RUN orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is codedto prevent another transmitter from unlockingyour vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourGM dealer. Remember to bring any additionaltransmitters so they can also be re-coded tomatch the new transmitter. Once your dealer hascoded the new transmitter, the lost transmitterwill not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle can havea maximum of eight transmitters matched to it.See Remote Key under DIC Operation andDisplays on page 187.

93

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutfour years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theremote keyless entry transmitter battery islow. See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY”under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 195for additional information.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter do the following:

1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located below the trunk releasebutton, and separate the bottom half from thetop half of the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

94

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle.

If your vehicle has an outside temperature display,during remote start this feature allows theclimate control system to default to a heatingmode during colder outside temperatures and acooling mode during warmer outside temperatures.If your vehicle does not have an outsidetemperature display, during remote start theclimate control system will turn on at the settingthe vehicle was set to when the vehicle waslast turned off.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, requiring a personusing remote start to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check local regulations forany requirements on remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

Your remote keyless entry transmitter, withthe remote start button, provides an increasedrange of operation. However, the range maybe less while the vehicle is running. As a result,you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn itoff, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 90 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lockbutton and then press and hold this button to usethe remote start feature.

95

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until theturn signal lights flash or if the vehicle’slights are not visible, press and hold theremote start button for at least four seconds.The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing theremote start button again after the vehicle hasstarted will turn off the ignition.

3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the vehicleis running.

4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.

When you enter the vehicle during a remotestart, and the engine is still running, turn thekey to the RUN position to drive the vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter atthe vehicle and press the remote startbutton until the parking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The remote vehicle start feature providestwo separate starts, each with 10 minutes of enginerunning, or it provides one start with 10 minutesof engine running that may be extended with10 more minutes. If you press and release thetransmitter lock button and then press andhold the remote start button, on the remotekeyless entry transmitter, again before the first10 minutes of engine running time has expired,10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.

96

For example, if the lock button and then the remotestart buttons are pressed again after five minutesof the engine run time, 10 minutes are added andyou now have 15 minutes of engine running. Theadded ten minutes are considered a second remotevehicle start. Once two remote starts or a singlestart with a time extension have been provided, thevehicle must be started normally with the ignitionkey to get more remote vehicle starts.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifthe key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed or ifthere is an emission control system malfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remotevehicle start if the coolant temperature gets toohigh or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles equipped with the remote vehicle startfeature are shipped from the factory with theremote vehicle start system enabled. The systemmay be enabled or disabled through the DIC.See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 203 for additionalinformation.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealerto add the manufacturer’s remote vehiclestart feature.

If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,your remote keyless entry transmitter will haveextended range that will allow you to lock or unlockyour vehicle from about 195 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

97

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out ofa moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter throughan unlocked door when you slowdown or stop your vehicle. Lockingyour doors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock thevehicle.

98

From the outside, use your key in the driver’sdoor or the remote keyless entry transmitter,if equipped. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 91. From the inside,use the manual or power door locks.

To manually unlock the driver’s door from theoutside, insert the key and turn it toward the frontof the vehicle.

To manually lock the driver’s door from theoutside, insert the key and turn it toward therear of the vehicle.

To lock a door from theinside, push the manuallock lever forward.To unlock a door, pushthe lever rearward.

Power Door Locks

A power door lockswitch is located oneach door abovethe armrest.

Press the top of the switch to unlock bothdoors, or press the bottom of the switch to lockboth doors.

If your vehicle has the optional contenttheft-deterrent system and it is armed, the powerdoor lock switches will be disabled. You mustuse your remote keyless entry transmitter,if equipped, or your key to unlock the doorswhile the system is armed.

99

Automatic Door LockThe doors will automatically lock when the shiftlever is moved out of PARK (P). The automaticdoor locking feature cannot be disabled.

Programmable AutomaticDoor UnlockYour vehicle is programmed so that when theshift lever is moved into PARK (P) all doors willunlock.

With the vehicle stopped and the engine running,door unlocking can be programmed throughprompts displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). These prompts allow the driver tochoose various unlock settings. For programminginformation, see DIC Vehicle Customizationon page 203.

Lockout ProtectionTo protect you from locking your key in thevehicle, this feature stops the power door locksfrom locking while the key is in the ignition anda door is open.

If a power lock switch is pressed while a door isopen and the key is in the ignition, both doorswill lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.A chime will sound continuously until both doorsare closed.

100

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunklid open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connectionsmust pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 121.

Trunk ReleaseTo open the trunk from the outside, press theopen trunk button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter, if equipped.

Remote Trunk ReleaseYou can also open the trunk from inside thevehicle.

G (Remote Trunk Release): Press the buttonwith the open trunk symbol on it. The button islocated next to the exterior lamps control onthe left side of the instrument panel. The shiftlever must be in PARK (P) for the remote trunkrelease button to work.

If your vehicle ever loses power, you can open thetrunk by lowering the rear seat and pulling theemergency trunk release handle located inside thetrunk. See Split Folding Rear Seat on page 16and “Emergency Trunk Release Handle” following.

101

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handlelocated on the latch inside the trunk. Thishandle will glow following exposure to light.Pull the release handle to open the trunk fromthe inside.

102

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

103

Power Windows

The switches on thedriver’s door are usedto control both windows.The passenger’swindow has aswitch also.

The power window switches work while theignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or whileRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 110.

To lower the window, press and hold the frontof the switch to the first position until the windowis at the desired level. To raise the window,pull up and hold the front of the switch.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature labeled AUTO. This allows you to lowerthe window completely without holding the switch.Press the front of the switch all the way downand release.

To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pullup on the switch.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors.They can be detached from the center retainer andslid along the rod to cover different areas of thefront window and rotated to cover the sidewindows.

Visor Vanity MirrorSwing down the sun visors and lift the cover toexpose the vanity mirror. If your vehicle has lightedvanity mirrors, the lamps come on when youopen the cover. Do not drive with the cover lifteddue to possible glare to other drivers behindor to the side of the vehicle.

Driver’s Switchesshown

104

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have the optional contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

To activate the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switchor the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.If you are using the RKE transmitter, the doordoes not need to be open.

3. Close all doors.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someonetries to enter the vehicle without using theRKE transmitter or a key or turns the ignition onwith an incorrect key. The horn will sound and theturn signal lamps will flash for about two minutes.

When the alarm is armed, the trunk may beopened with the RKE transmitter. The power doorlock switches are disabled and the doors remainlocked. You must use your RKE transmitter or yourkey to unlock the doors when the system isarmed.

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchThe alarm system will arm when you use eitherpower lock switch to lock the doors while any dooror the trunk is open and the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Arming with the RKE TransmitterThe alarm system will arm when you use yourRKE transmitter to lock the doors, if the key is notin the ignition.

Disarming with the RKE TransmitterThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourRKE transmitter to unlock the doors.

The first time a remote unlock command isreceived, three flashes will be seen and three hornchirps heard to indicate an alarm condition hasoccurred since last arming.

105

Disarming with Your KeyThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourkey to unlock the doors or insert your key inignition and turn it from the OFF position.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.


1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.


1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoderin your vehicle.

106

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you transition the keyto RUN, ACCESSORY or START from the OFFposition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel cluster comes onwhen trying to start the vehicle, the key may havea damaged transponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to checkthe fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 395. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoderto learn the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keys maybe programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates the system.

107

To program the new additional key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, keyin the ignition and start the engine. If theengine will not start, see your dealerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turnit to the RUN position within five seconds ofremoving the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating YourVehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 284 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

108

Ignition PositionsWith the ignition key in the ignition, the key can beturned to four different positions:

Notice: Using a tool to force the key fromthe ignition switch could cause damageor break the key. Use the correct key and turnthe key only with your hand. Make sure thekey is in all the way. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which theignition key can be inserted or removed. Thisposition locks the ignition and transaxle. It is atheft-deterrent feature.

B (ACCESSORY): This position lets the radioand windshield wipers operate while the engine isoff. To use ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

C (RUN): This position is where the key returnsto after the vehicle is started. This position displayssome of the warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ACCESSORY or RUN position withthe engine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will display DRIVERDOOR OPEN when the driver’s door is openedif the ignition is in OFF, ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 195 for more information.

109

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ignition while your vehicle is parked. Youmay not be able to start your vehicle after it hasbeen parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP),which will allow your vehicle’s radio to workwhen the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF theradio will continue to work 10 minutes or untilthe driver’s door is opened. Also, the powerwindows will continue to work for up to 10 minutesor until any door is opened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position -- this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine gets warm.Do not race the engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engine and transaxlegently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

110

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turningthe ignition switch to the ACCESSORY orOFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in START forup to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

111

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature. In very coldweather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can help. You will get easier starting andbetter fuel economy during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is attached to the undersideof the diagonal brace, which is located abovethe engine air cleaner/filter assembly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

112

Active Fuel Management™(5.3L V8 Engine)Your vehicle’s engine may be equipped withActive Fuel Management™. This system allowsthe engine to operate on either all or half ofits cylinders, depending on your driving conditions.

When less power is required, such as cruisingat a constant vehicle speed, the system willoperate in the half cylinder mode, allowing yourvehicle to achieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power demands are required, suchas accelerating from a stop, passing, or mergingonto a freeway, the system will maintainfull-cylinder operation.

Automatic Transaxle OperationYour automatic transaxle has a shift lever on theconsole between the seats.

There is a display, located on the instrument panelcluster that will indicate the gear the vehicle is in.

Maximum engine speed is limited on automatictransaxle vehicles while you are in PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) to protect driveline componentsfrom improper operation.

113

There are several different positions for theshift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when the engine isstarted because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 284.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. You must fullyapply your regular brakes first and then press theshift lever button before you can shift fromPARK (P) while the ignition is in RUN. If you cannotshift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shiftlever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P) as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 120.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 276.

114

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is runningat high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is runningat high speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not runningat high speeds when shifting your vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator pedal all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 260

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in SECOND (2) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

115

THIRD (3): It reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using your brakes. Youmight choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)when driving on hilly, winding roads, when towinga trailer, so there is less shifting between gearsand when going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward,the transaxle will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

116

Parking Brake

The parking brake islocated to the left ofthe brake pedal,near the driver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot. Push down the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot and push the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot. When you lift yourleft foot, the parking brake pedal will follow itto the released position.

A warning chime will sound and a brake warninglight located on the instrument panel clusterwill come on, if the parking brake is set, the ignitionis on and the vehicle speed is greater than5 mph (8 km/h).

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 284.

117

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 284.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe shift lever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

118

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked in PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called torque lock. To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and then shift intoPARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’sseat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)on page 118.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push your vehicle a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

119

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You must fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 113.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever by pushing it all the way intoPARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pusheddown. Release the shift lever button if youhave a console shift. Then move the shift lever outof PARK (P), being sure to press the shift leverbutton if you have a console shift.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal down until theend of Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL.

4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gearyou want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

120

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

121

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 121.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER parkin a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 270.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 118.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pullinga trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 284.

122

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly whenyou are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, pullthe lever at the bottom of the mirror toward you(to the night position). To return the mirror back tothe day position, push the lever away from you.

There are two lamps located on the bottom of themirror. Press the button next to each lamp toturn it on and off.

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar®

If the vehicle has this mirror, it has a lever locatedat the bottom of the mirror between the two lamps.The lever is used to change the mirror from theday to the night position. To reduce glare fromheadlamps behind you while driving at night, pullthe lever toward you. To return the mirror to the dayposition, return the lever to its original position.

There are two map lamps located on the bottomof the mirror. Press the button next to each lampto turn it on and off.

There are also OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 125for more information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with OnStar®

The vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with the OnStar® System.

Press the button located below the mirror, onthe far left, for up to three seconds to turnthe automatic dimming feature off and on.

There are two map lamps located on the bottomof the mirror. Press the button next to each lampto turn it on and off.

There are also OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer formore information on the system and how tosubscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® Systemon page 125 for more information about theservice OnStar® provides.

123

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrorsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

Use the selector switch located below the four-waycontrol panel to choose either the left or rightoutside mirror. Then press any of the four arrowslocated on the control pad to move each mirrorin the desired direction.

Adjust each mirror so you can see the side ofyour vehicle and the area beside and behindyour vehicle.

Outside Convex MirrorYour passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so you can see morefrom the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicleon your right. Check your inside mirroror glance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

Outside Heated MirrorsIf your vehicle has this option, the surface of bothoutside mirrors will heat when you activate the rearwindow defogger. See “Rear Window Defogger”under Climate Control System on page 164.

124

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1–888–4–ONSTAR (1–888–466–7827)or TTY 1–877–248–2080, or press the OnStar®

button to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hoursa day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

125

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond the firstyear, or upgrade to the Directions & Connections®

Plan. For more information, press the OnStar®

button to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar®

services (such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)

(If equipped)• Link to Emergency Services• Roadside Assistance• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance• AccidentAssist• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or

OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)• RideAssist• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

126

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 240 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be usedto dial numbers into voicemail systems, or todial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

127

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and availablein that place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

128

Universal Home RemoteSystem

Universal Home Remote System(With Three Round LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is KOBGTE05A.




The Canadian Registration ID number is3521A-GTE05A.


129

Universal Home Remote System(With One Triangular LED)The Universal Home Remote System providesa way to replace up to three hand-heldradio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment AuthorizationCertificate number is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is2791021849A.


130

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal Home RemoteSystem. If there are three round Light EmittingDiode (LED) above the Universal Home RemoteSystem buttons, follow the instructions below.If there is one triangular LED above the UniversalHome Remote System buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (with one triangular LED).

This system provides a way to replace up tothree remote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.

Do not use the this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,for future programming. You only need theoriginal remote control transmitter for fixed codeprogramming. It is also recommended thatupon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing your UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in this section.

Be sure that people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or security device you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

131

If you do not know if your garage door opener is afixed code or rolling code device, open yourgarage door opener’s remote control battery cover.Your garage door opener is a fixed code deviceif there is a panel of switches. If not, yourgarage door opener is a rolling code device.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeFixed Code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed codeuses the same coded signal every time, whichis manually programmed by setting DIP switchesfor a unique personal code.

Follow these steps to program up to threechannels:

1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-heldtransmitter.

132

2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switchsettings from left to right. When the switchis in the up position, write “on,” and when aswitch is in the down position, write “off”.If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “middle”.

3. Enter these positions into the Universal HomeRemote System as follows.Press and release all three buttons at the sametime to put the device into programming mode.

4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In orderfrom left to right, and within two and one-halfminutes, enter each switch setting into theUniversal Home Remote System. Pushone button for each switch as follows:

• Left button = “on” switch position.

• Right button = “off” switch position.

• Middle button = “middle” switch position.

5. After entering the switch settings, press andrelease all three buttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

Example of Switch Settings

133

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–8, choosing adifferent function button in Step 7 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeRolling code garage door openers are used forgarage doors produced after 1996 and arecode protected. Rolling code means the codedsignal is changed every time your remote controlgarage door opener is used.

Programming a rolling code garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, so read theentire procedure before you begin. If you do notfollow these actions, the device will time outand you will have to repeat the procedure.

Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press the two outside buttons at the sametime for one to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

134

2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage doormotor head and press and release the“learn” button.After pressing the “learn” button, you have10 to 30 seconds to complete Step 4depending on your garage control unit. If youcannot locate the “learn” button, refer tothe owners guide for your garage door opener.

3. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light, abovethe selected button, should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to20 seconds.

4. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

5. Press and release the button again. Thegarage door should move, confirming thatprogramming is successful and complete.

To program another device such as an additionalgarage door opener, a security device, orhome lighting, repeat Steps 1–6, choosing adifferent function button in Step 4 than what youused for the garage door opener.

135

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.

To erase either rolling code or fixed code on theUniversal Home Remote device, do the following:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons atthe same time for approximately 20 seconds,until the indicator lights, located directlyabove the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbutton will be erased.

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With one triangular LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) above the UniversalHome Remote buttons, follow the instructionsbelow. If your vehicle has three round LED abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With three round LED).

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.If you have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

136

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for usein other vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” laterin this section or, for assistance, see CustomerAssistance Offices on page 426.

Be sure that people and objects are clear ofthe garage door or gate operator you areprogramming. When programming a garage door,it is advised to park outside of the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

Programming Universal Home RemoteFollow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away fromthe Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote buttonand the hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

137

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constant light,continue with Steps 6 through 8 following tocomplete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage door opener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the samebutton a second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and holdthe same button a third time for two seconds,then release.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Youdo not want to repeat Step 1, as this will eraseall previous programming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

138

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signalis being transmitted.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote ButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons do the following:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier inthis section.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but theycan be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

139

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed withStep 2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.

For additional information on Universal HomeRemote, see Customer Assistance Officeson page 426.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle is equipped with cupholders locatedbetween the front seats and in the rear seat armrest.

Center Console Storage AreaThe console has cupholders and a storage area.To open the console’s storage area, press thelatch located toward the front of the console lid onthe driver’s side of the vehicle.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle has a rear seat armrest withcupholders. To access, pull the tab on thearmrest forward.

140

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon the back wall of the trunk.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Storethose in the trunk as far forward as possible.

Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.

SunroofIf your vehicle has thisfeature, the sunroofswitches are located onthe overhead console.

The sunroof can only be operated when theignition is in ACCESSORY, RUN, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 110.

Q (Vent/Express-Open): To vent the sunroofwhen it is closed, press this switch once.When using the vent, the sunshade should be fullyopened. The sunshade can be opened or closedmanually by sliding it rearward or forward.

From the vent position, press this switch again toactivate the express-open feature. Press theclose switch to stop movement of the sunroof.The sunshade will automatically open when usingexpress-open.

R (Close): To close the sunroof, press and holdthis switch until the sunroof motor stops, orrelease the switch when the desired position hasbeen reached.

141

✍ NOTES

142

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 146Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 148Other Warning Devices ............................. 148Horn .......................................................... 148Tilt Wheel .................................................. 148Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 149Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 150Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 151Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 151Windshield Wipers ..................................... 151Windshield Washer .................................... 152Cruise Control ........................................... 153Exterior Lamps .......................................... 156Delayed Headlamps .................................. 157Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .................. 158Fog Lamps ................................................ 158Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 159Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 159Dome Lamp .............................................. 159Entry Lighting ............................................ 160Delayed Entry Lighting .............................. 160Delayed Exit Lighting ................................. 160Parade Dimming ........................................ 161

Reading Lamps ......................................... 161Electric Power Management ...................... 161Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 162Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 162Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 164

Climate Controls ......................................... 164Climate Control System ............................. 164Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 168Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 169

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 170Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 171Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 172Tachometer ............................................... 172Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 173Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 173Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 174Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 175Charging System Light .............................. 177Brake System Warning Light ..................... 177Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 178Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 179Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 179

Section 3 Instrument Panel

143

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 180Tire Pressure Light .................................... 180Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 181Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 184Security Light ............................................ 184Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 185Cruise Control Light .................................. 185Highbeam On Light ................................... 185Fuel Gage ................................................. 185

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 186DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 187DIC Compass ............................................ 193DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 195DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 203

Audio System(s) ......................................... 210Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 211Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 212Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 214Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 220Using an MP3 ........................................... 231XM Radio Messages ................................. 238Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 240Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 240Radio Reception ........................................ 241Care of Your CDs ..................................... 242Care of the CD Player .............................. 242Backglass Antenna .................................... 242XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 243

Section 3 Instrument Panel

144

✍ NOTES

145

Instrument Panel Overview

146

The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:

A. Air Vent. See Outlet Adjustment on page 168.B. Remote Trunk Release Button. See “Remote

Trunk Release” under Trunk on page 101.C. Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 149.D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 171.E. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 148.F. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See

Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 186.G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 210.H. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps

on page 156.I. Instrument Panel Brightness. See Instrument

Panel Brightness on page 159.J. Traction Control On/Off Button (If Equipped).

See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 254.

K. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel onpage 148.

L. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Controlon page 153.

M. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 307.

N. Horn. See Horn on page 148.O. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).

See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 240.

P. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions onpage 109.

Q. Climate Controls. See Climate Control Systemon page 164.

R. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 162.

S. Automatic Transaxle Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 113.

T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 140.

147

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon top of the steeringcolumn.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is not in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash. Press the button again to turnthe flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. The steering wheel can beraised to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The tilt wheel lever is located on the left side ofthe steering column.

148

To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever.Then move the wheel to a comfortable positionand release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See

Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 150.• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 151.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 151.• NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers

on page 151.• LQ Windshield Washer. See Windshield

Washer on page 152.For information on the headlamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 156.

149

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.

If the arrow flashes faster than normal as yousignal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers won’t seeyour turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andthen check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 395.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf you leave either one of your turn signals on anddrive more than three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km),a chime will sound to alert you.

150

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change your headlamps from low beams to highbeams, or from high to low, pull the multifunctionlever all the way toward you. Then release it.

While the high beamsare on, this light willappear on theinstrument panel cluster.

This light works only while the key is in RUN. Thefog lamps (if equipped) are not illuminatedwhen the high beams are on.

Flash-to-PassWith the turn signal lever in the low-beam position,pull the lever toward you briefly to switch tohigh-beam, (to signal you are going to pass).

If the headlamps are on, they will return tolow-beam when the lever is released.

This feature operates even if the headlamps are off.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damagedwiper blades may not clear the windshield well,making it harder to see and drive safely. Ifthe blades do become damaged, install newblades or blade inserts. For more information, seeWindshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 347.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

You control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn theband to mist. Hold it there until the wipersstart. Then let go. The wipers will stop afterone wipe. If you want more wipe cycles, holdthe band on mist longer.

151

6 (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a longor short delay between wiping cycles. This canbe very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the bandto choose the delay time. The closer to the topof the lever, the shorter the delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid band past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turnthe band further, to the second solid band past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Windshield WasherAt the top of the multifunction lever, there’s apaddle with the windshield washer symbol on it.To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push thepaddle. The wipers will run for several sweeps andthen either stop or return to your preset speed. Theignition key must be in ACCESSORY or RUN forthis to work. See Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 332.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When you are low on washer fluid, a Washer FluidLow Add Fluid message will be lit in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) for 60 seconds. When theignition is turned off, a message will appearagain for three seconds as a reminder thatthe fluid level is low. For more information onDIC messages, see DIC Warnings and Messageson page 195.

The washer fluid message will no longer displaywhen the washer fluid reservoir has been filled.

152

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system, if your vehicle has thisfeature, begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. See Traction

Control System (TCS) on page 254. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again,the cruise control can be turned back on.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onleft side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator will be litwhen cruise control is on.+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET–: Press this button to set the speed or makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancelcruise control.

153

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if the parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press and release the SET– button located onthe steering wheel.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shuts offthe cruise control, but it does not need to be reset.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on the steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to your chosenspeed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo increase the cruise speed while usingcruise control:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button.

154

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until you reach the lower speedyou want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time this is done, you will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to the cruise speed youset earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain your speed. When going downhill, youmay have to brake or shift to a lower gear tokeep your speed down. Of course, applying thebrake ends the cruise control. Many driversfind this to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ (cancel) button on thesteering wheel.

• Press the T (on/off) button on thesteering wheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased byturning off the cruise control or the ignition.

155

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps (if equipped)

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn the control to this position toturn off the automatic light control. Briefly turnto this position again to turn automatic light controlon again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to automatically turn on the headlamps atnormal brightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Taillamps



156

2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below. A warning chime willsound if you open the driver’s door when theignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



- (Fog Lamps, If your vehicle has them): Pushthe fog lamps control in to turn on the fog lamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 158.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature provides a periodof exterior lighting as you leave the area aroundyour vehicle. The feature is activated whenthe headlamps are on due to the automaticheadlamps control feature later described in thissection, and when the ignition is turned off.Your headlamps will then remain on until theexterior lamps control is moved to the parkinglamps position or until either a 30 second or60 second lighting period has ended.

If you turn off the ignition with the headlampsswitch in the parking lamps or headlamps position,the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur.

To disable the delayed headlamps feature orchange the time of delay, see “Exit Lighting” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 203.

157

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make iteasier for others to see the front of your vehicleduring the day. DRL can be helpful in manydifferent driving conditions, but they can beespecially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytimerunning lamps are required on all vehicles firstsold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system’s automatic headlamp controlwill make the low-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is in RUN.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only the low-beamheadlamps, at a reduced level of brightness, willbe on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, andother lamps will not be on. The instrumentpanel and cluster will also not be lit.

When it is dark enough outside, your low-beamheadlamps will turn off and the headlampsand parking lamps will turn on. The other lampsthat come on with the headlamps will alsocome on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off and the DRL will come on.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Fog Lamps

- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,the button is located on the exterior lamps control.The exterior lamps control is located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steering column.

The ignition must be in RUN for the fog lampsto illuminate.

158

To turn the fog lamps on, press exterior lampsbutton. A light will come on in the instrument panelcluster to show that the fog lamps are on. Pressthe exterior lamps button again to turn the foglamps off.

The ignition must be in RUN and the parkinglamps must be on for the fog lamps to work. Theparking lamps will turn on automatically whenthe fog lamps are turned on.

The fog lamps will go off while you change tohigh-beam headlamps.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knobwith this symbol on it is located next to the exteriorlamps control. Press the knob until it pops outand then turn the knob clockwise to brightenor counterclockwise to dim the lights.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, the courtesy lampsautomatically come on. They make it easy for youto enter and leave your vehicle. You can alsomanually turn these lamps on by turning theinstrument panel brightness control clockwise allthe way.

The reading lamps, located on the rearviewmirror, can be turned on or off independent ofthe automatic courtesy lamps, when the doorsare closed.

Dome LampThe dome lamp will come on when you open adoor. You can also turn this lamp on by turning theinstrument panel brightness control clockwise.

159

Entry LightingYour vehicle may have the entry lighting feature.Your courtesy lamps will come on and stay onfor a set time whenever you press UNLOCK on theremote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.

If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’sopen and then turn off automatically about25 seconds after you close it. If you pressUNLOCK and don’t open a door, the lamps willturn off after about 40 seconds.

Illuminated entry includes a feature called theaterdimming. With theater dimming, the lampsdon’t just turn off at the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim after the delay time untilthey go out. The delay time is canceled if youturn the ignition key to RUN or press the powerdoor lock switch.

When the ignition is on, illuminated entry isinactive, which means the courtesy lamps won’tcome on unless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for aperiod of time after all the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting towork. Immediately after both doors have beenclosed, the delayed entry lighting feature willcontinue to work until one of the following occurs:


• The doors are locked.

• An illumination period of 20 seconds haselapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on.

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interior for a period oftime after the key is removed from the ignition.

160

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting towork. When the key is removed, interiorillumination will activate and remain on until one ofthe following occurs:


• The power door locks are activated.

• An illumination period of 20 seconds haselapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on because adoor is open.

Parade DimmingThe instrument panel has an added feature calledparade dimming. This feature prohibits thedimming of your instrument panel displays duringthe daylight while the headlamps are on sothat you’ll still be able to see the displays.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located on the rearviewmirror. Press the button to turn them on and off.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true forall vehicles. This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that is neededfor very high electrical loads.

161

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 195.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained, if the interior courtesylamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lampsor trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, they will automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back on again untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control is turned off, thenon again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if theyare manually turned on before the ignition is off.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle has a two 12-volt outlets which can beused to plug in electrical equipment such as acellular telephone, a compact disc player, etc.

162

One is located at the front of the console and theother is located at the rear of the console. Lift thecover to access the outlet. When not using theoutlet, make sure the protective cover is in place.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysunplug electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory power plugs may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If youexperience a problem see your dealer for additionalinformation on the accessory power plugs.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment. Check with your dealerbefore adding electrical equipment, and never useanything that exceeds the amperage rating of20 amperes.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

163

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter andashtray located on the console. The ashtrayis removable and has a cupholder and linerunderneath. To remove the ashtray, lift it up withthe liner and pull it out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into theheating element and let go. When the lighteris ready it will pop out by itself.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThis vehicle may have a dual or single climatecontrol system. With this system you can controlthe heating, cooling, defrost, defog andventilation for the vehicle. If this vehicle hasheated seats, see Heated Seats on page 10.

Dual Zone with Optional Heated Seat Controls

164

Manual OperationTurn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto direct the airflow inside of the vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets and the other halfto the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets, with some of the air directedto the windshield and side window outlets. In thismode, the system will automatically selectOutside Air.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

By positioning the right knob between two modes,a combination of those two modes is selected.

The air conditioning compressor will operateunless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C)or below.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. If the airflow seems low when the fanis at the highest setting, the passengercompartment air filter may need to be replaced.For more information, see PassengerCompartment Air Filter on page 169 andScheduled Maintenance on page 406.

Single Zone

165

: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn onoutside air. When this mode is on, outside airwill circulate throughout your vehicle. When thebutton is pressed, an indicator light will come on toshow that it is on.

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn onthe recirculation mode. When the button ispressed, an indicator light will come on to showthat it is on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air andodors from entering your vehicle. Recirculationmay also help heat or cool the air inside yourvehicle more quickly once the temperature insidethe vehicle is equal to or better than the outsidetemperature. The recirculation mode cannotbe used with outside air, floor, defrost, ordefogging modes.

Temperature Control: Turn the thumbwheels upor down to increase or decrease the temperatureon the driver’s side or the passenger side ofthe vehicle for the dual zone system. Turn thecenter knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the temperature for thesingle zone system.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. WhenA/C is pressed, an indicator light will come on tolet you know that the air conditioning is on.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select A/C.

3. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.

4. Select the highest fan speeds.

5. When the coolest temperature is selected inthe A/C mode, the system will automaticallygo into the recirculation mode to improvecooling. Press the Outside Air or Recirculationbutton to turn off the automatic recirculation.This feature will stay off until the climatecontrol system is powered on again or thevehicle has been turned off and on again.

166

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air inside of your vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to removefog or frost from the windshield more quickly.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Turn the right knob clockwise to select the defogor defrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air equally to thewindshield and the floor outlets. When defogis selected, the system turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is below 40°F (4°C).

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield with some air to the side windowvents and the floor vents. When defrost is selected,the system will automatically force outside air intothe vehicle. The air conditioning compressor will runautomatically in this setting, unless the outsidetemperature is below 40°F (4°C).

167

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

<: The rear window defogger will turn offautomatically after it has been activated for10 minutes. It can be turned off manually, bypressing the button again or by turning the ignitionto the OFF position. If additional window clearingis required, the rear window defogger can beturned on again for additional window clearing. Thelength of defogger operation will increase if thevehicle is being driven.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearviewmirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog orfrost from the surface of the mirror when therear window defog button is pressed. See OutsidePower Mirrors on page 124.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the knob located below or to the side of theoutlet, to change the direction of the air flow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside yourvehicle more effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartment airfilter, if equipped, may need to replaced. Formore information, see Passenger CompartmentAir Filter on page 169 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 406.

168

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThis vehicle has a passenger compartmentparticulate air filter. It is located in the enginecompartment, on the passenger’s side, underthe air inlet grille.

The filter traps most of the pollen from air enteringthe climate control system. Like the engine’s aircleaner/filter, it may need to be changedperiodically to ensure system performance. Forinformation on how often to change the passengercompartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenanceon page 406.

To change the passenger compartment air filter,use the following steps:

1. Turn off the ignition when the windshieldwipers are in the up position.

2. Raise the vehicle hood.

3. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hosefrom the fender rail and air inlet grille.

4. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from thepassenger’s side of the vehicle halfwayto center.

5. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.

6. Remove the air inlet grille.

7. Remove the water deflector plate.

8. Remove the old passenger compartmentair filter.

9. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.

For best climate control system performance,be sure to re-install the air filter.

For the type of filter to use, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 416.

169

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know they’reworking. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly – and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with the warninglights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 186.

170

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need todrive safely and economically.

United States Uplevel shown, Base and Canada similar

171

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far yourvehicle has been driven in either miles (used in theUnited States) or in kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. Ifyou see ERROR, you’ll know someone hasprobably tampered with it and the numbers maynot be accurate.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the newone can be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then that will be done. But if it can’t,then it will be set at zero and a label must be puton the driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed.

Tachometer

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

The tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

172

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN, a chime willcome on for several seconds to remind people tofasten their safety belts, unless the driver’ssafety belt is already buckled.

This chime and light willbe repeated if the driverremains unbuckledand the vehicleis in motion.

The safety belt light will also come on and stayon for several seconds, then it will flash forseveral more.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 77 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and lightwill be repeated ifthe passenger remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

173

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 68.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

174

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your overhead console has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. If you useremote start to start your vehicle from a distance(if equipped), you may not see the systemcheck. Then, after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to let you know thestatus of the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and side impact airbag (if equipped).

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbags deploy.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and sideimpact airbag (if equipped) if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


175

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s airbag or airbagsare enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s airbag or airbags. See PassengerSensing System on page 77 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of an airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 174.

176

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but theengine is not running,as a check to show youit is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.


177

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 177 andTowing Your Vehicle on page 282.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle isequipped with anti-lockbrakes, the anti-lockbrake system warninglight should come on fora few seconds whenyou turn the ignitionkey to RUN.

If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays onlonger than normal after you’ve started yourengine, turn the ignition off or, if the light comeson and stays on when you are driving, stopas soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Thenstart the engine again to reset the system. Ifthe light still stays on, or comes on again whileyou are driving, the anti-lock brake system needsservice and you do not have anti-lock brakes.

The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignitionkey to RUN. This is normal. If the light does notcome on then, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn you if there is a problem.

178

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

For vehicles equippedwith the traction controlsystem, this warninglight should comeon briefly when theengine is started.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, there may be a problem with your tractioncontrol system and your vehicle may need service.When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

If the traction control system warning light comeson and stays on for an extended period oftime when the system is turned on, your vehicleneeds service. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 254 for more information.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 323 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 323. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on when starting yourvehicle. If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.

179

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves towards the “H”(United States) or the shaded in thermostat(Canada), it means that your engine coolant hasoverheated. If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal driving conditions, you shouldpull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 323 for moreinformation.

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) will accompanythe light. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 195 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 349 for more information.


180

This light will flash for approximately 60 secondsand then stay on if a problem is detected withthe Tire Pressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 358for more information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The check engine light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent.

This may prevent more serious damage to yourvehicle. This system is also designed to assist yourservice technician in correctly diagnosing anymalfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehiclewith this light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 296.

181

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 303.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

182

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 298. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

183

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This light tells you ifthere could be aproblem with yourengine oil pressure.

The light goes on when you turn your key to RUN orSTART. It goes off once you start your engine. Thatis a check to be sure the light works. If it does notcome on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be thereto warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.

Security Light

For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystems on page 105.

184

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 158 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 153 formore information.

Highbeam On LightThis light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 151.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel you have remaining.


185

Here are four things that some owners askabout. None of these show a problem with yourfuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full, butit actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when youturn off the ignition.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated below the speedometer in the instrumentpanel cluster. The DIC buttons are located onthe instrument panel, to the right of the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The bottom line of theDIC shows the shift lever position indicator. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 113for more information.

If your vehicle has these features, the DIC alsodisplays the compass direction and the outside airtemperature when viewing the trip and fuelinformation. The compass direction appears onthe top right corner of the DIC display. The outsideair temperature automatically appears in thebottom right corner of the DIC display. If there is aproblem with the system that controls thetemperature display, the numbers will be replacedwith dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 203 for more information.

186

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe instrument panel, to the right of theinstrument panel cluster.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are thetrip/fuel, vehicleinformation,customization, andset/reset buttons.The button functionsare detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, instantaneous economy, ActiveFuel Management™ indicator on vehicles with thisfeature, and average speed.

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button todisplay the oil life, units, tire pressure readings andTire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming,compass zone and compass calibration onvehicles with this feature, and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter programming.

U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 203for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km).

187

Trip A and Trip BPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP Bdisplays. This display shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used at the same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, thetrip odometer will accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)before it is started again, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, the display will show5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during the lastignition cycle.

188

Fuel RangePress the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km)the vehicle can be driven without refueling.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle’s fuel economy over recent drivinghistory and the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving in traffic and makingfrequent stops, this display may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the numbermay change even though the same amount of fuelis in the fuel tank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fuel economies.Generally, freeway driving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVELLOW message will be displayed. See “FUELLEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 195 for more information.

Average EconomyPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button. The display will return to zero.

Instantaneous Economy and Active FuelManagement™ IndicatorPress the trip/fuel button until INST ECONOMYdisplays. If your vehicle has the Active FuelManagement™ feature, INST ECONOMY8CYL MODE will display on vehicles with aV8 engine or INST ECONOMY 6CYL MODE willdisplay on vehicles with a V6 engine. This displayshows the current fuel economy at a particularmoment and will change frequently as drivingconditions change. This display shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon(mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).Unlike average economy, this screen cannotbe reset.

189

If your vehicle has the Active Fuel Management™feature, an Active Fuel Management™ indicatorwill display on the right side of the DIC, while INSTECONOMY displays on the left side. Active FuelManagement™ allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders, depending onyour driving demands.

For vehicles with a V8 engine, when Active FuelManagement™ is active, 4CYL MODE will display.When Active Fuel Management™ is inactive,8CYL MODE will display.

For vehicles with a V6 engine, when Active FuelManagement™ is active, 3CYL MODE will display.When Active Fuel Management™ is inactive,6CYL MODE will display.

See Active Fuel Management™ (5.3L V8 Engine)on page 113 for more information.

Average SpeedPress the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows the average speed ofthe vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recorded since the lastreset of this value. To reset the value, press andhold the set/reset button. The display will returnto zero.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

Oil LifePress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,that means 99% of the current oil life remains.The engine oil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

190

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 195. Youshould change the oil as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 311. In addition to the engine oillife system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 406 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other than when the oilhas just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 314.

UnitsPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.

Tire PressureThe pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until theDIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information buttonagain until the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 357 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 195 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer for service.

191

Learn Tire PositionsTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). After rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)system must re-learn the tire positions.To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire PressureMonitor System on page 358. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 362 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 195 for more information.

Compass ZoneYour vehicle may have this feature. Under certaincircumstances, such as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary tocompensate for compass variance and reset thezone. To change the compass zone throughthe DIC, see DIC Compass on page 193.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated.To calibrate the compass through the DIC, seeDIC Compass on page 193.

Remote KeyTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to match theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button.The message REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE will display.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

192

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Customization Menu Items

U (Customization): Press this button to enter thefeature settings menu. This display allows youto customize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 203for more information.

DIC CompassYour vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Compass ZoneUnder certain circumstances, such as duringa long distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone through the DIC.

Compass variance is the difference between theearth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass in the vehicle could givefalse readings.

In order to do this, the compass must be set orcalibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicleis traveling.

193

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Variance Procedure1. Press the vehicle information button until

PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location andvariance zone number on the map.Zones 1 through 15 are available.

3. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand select the appropriate variance zone.Navigate to one of the trip/fuel menu screensto view the direction the vehicle is moving.This will be shown in the top right corner of theDIC display.

4. If you need to calibrate the compass, use thecompass calibration procedure. See“Compass Calibration Procedure” following.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Onlycalibrate the compass in a safe location wheredriving the vehicle in circles is not a problem.If “CAL” should ever appear in the DIC display, thecompass may need calibration.

194

To calibrate the compass, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure

the compass zone is set to the variancezone in which the vehicle is traveling. See“Compass Variance Procedure” earlier inthis section.

2. Press the vehicle information button until thePRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPASSscreen is displayed.

3. Press the set/reset button to start thecompass calibration.

4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVEIN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in circles atless than 5 mph (8 km/h) to completethe calibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE when thecalibration is complete.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another. Some messagesmay not require immediate action, but you canpress the set/reset button to acknowledge that youreceived the message and clear it from the DICdisplay. Pressing any of the DIC buttons alsoacknowledges and clears any messages. Somemessages cannot be cleared from the DIC displaybecause they are more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can be cleared.You should take any messages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make the messagesdisappear, not correct the problem. The followingare the possible messages that can be displayedand some information about them.

195

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. See Exterior Lamps onpage 156 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. See Exterior Lamps onpage 156 for more information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle thatyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 311 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 406 for more information.

Acknowledging the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING.That must be done at the OIL LIFE screenunder the vehicle information menu. See “Oil Life”under DIC Operation and Displays on page 187and Engine Oil Life System on page 314.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the tires needs to be checked. This messagealso displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needsto be checked. You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Have the tire pressures checked and set tothose shown on the Tire Loading Information Label.

196

See Tires on page 349, Loading Your Vehicle onpage 277, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 357. The DIC display also shows the tirepressure values for the front and rear tires bypressing the vehicle information button. See DICOperation and Displays on page 187. If the tirepressure is low, the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 180.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s door isnot closed properly. When this message appears,make sure that the driver’s door is closedcompletely.

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressor is automaticallyturned off. When the coolant temperature returns tonormal, the A/C operation automatically resumes.You can continue to drive your vehicle. If thismessage continues to appear, have the systemrepaired by your dealer as soon as possible toavoid compressor damage.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OILThis message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil is low. Fill the oil to the proper level as soon aspossible. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 308 for the engine oil fill location. Also, seeEngine Oil on page 311 for information on the kindof oil to use and the proper oil level.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 323 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down.

197

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 323 for more information.

This message displays along with a continuouschime when the engine has overheated. Stop andturn the engine off immediately to avoid severeengine damage. See Engine Overheating onpage 323.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.

ERRORThis message displays while viewing the odometeror trip odometers if there is a problem with theinstrument panel cluster. See your dealer forservice.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 185 and Filling the Tankon page 303 for more information.

HOOD OPENIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when the hood is not closedproperly. When this message appears, make surethat the hood is closed completely. See HoodRelease on page 307.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

198

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle whilethe engine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 311 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’sengine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster.See Oil Pressure Light on page 184.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the passenger’s dooris not closed properly. When this messageappears, make sure that the passenger’s door isclosed completely.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 91 and DIC Operationand Displays on page 187 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays when the battery inthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needsto be replaced. To replace the battery, see“Battery Replacement” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 91.

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message displays when the electronicsensors that control the air conditioning andheating systems are no longer working. Havethe climate control system serviced by yourdealer if you notice a drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

199

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 174 for more information.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourdealer immediately.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays when service is requiredon the brake system. Have the brake systemserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.The brake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Brake System WarningLight on page 177.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGThis message displays when a problem isdetected with the power steering system. Whenthis message is displayed, you may notice that theeffort required to steer the vehicle increases orfeels heavier, but you will still be able to steer thevehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system programmed in thekey. A fault has been detected in the systemwhich means that the system is disabled and it isnot protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usuallyrestarts; however, you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on page 107 formore information.

200

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when thesystem is not functioning properly. A warning lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster.See Traction Control System (TCS) WarningLight on page 179. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 254 for more information.Have the TCS serviced by your dealer as soonas possible.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the transaxle. See your dealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled due to the electronic throttle controlsystem. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN, and will not disappear until the problemis resolved.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 105 for more information.

201

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may be displayed if the gas cap isnot on, or is not fully tightened. Check the gascap to ensure that it is on properly. See Filling theTank on page 303 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tirepositions. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 358. The tire positions must be re-learnedafter rotating the tires or after replacing a tireor sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 362 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 357for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when theTCS turns off. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 254 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.

Any of the following conditions may cause theTCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing thetraction control button. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 254 for moreinformation.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer forservice.

TRACTION CONTROL ONIf your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays whenthe TCS is turned on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 254 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINEThis message displays when the transaxle fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until it cools down. If the warningmessage continues to display, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

202

TRUNK OPENThis message displays when the trunk is notclosed completely. Make sure that the trunk isclosed completely. See Trunk on page 101.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turnsignal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever onpage 149.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. The message willnot disappear until the turn signal is manuallyturned off, or a turn is completed.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDThis message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washerreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 308 for thelocation of the windshield washer reservoir. Also,see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 332 formore information.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle has customization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to onepreferred setting. Customization features can onlybe programmed to one setting on the vehicleand cannot be programmed to a preferred settingfor two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

203

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter thefeature settings menu.If the menu is not available, FEATURESETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display.Before entering the menu, make sure thevehicle is in PARK (P).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the customization button until the PRESS V

TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/reset buttonto display all DIC messages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following choices:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appearin English.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appearin French.

ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Select one of the available choices and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on theDIC to select it.

204

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not toturn off the automatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select which doors and whenthe doors will automatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Unlock onpage 100 for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).



REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter if any of the doorsare open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 91 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

HORN & LIGHTS OFF: There will be nofeedback when you press the lock button on theRKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on theRKE transmitter.

205

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressed again withinfive seconds of the previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitterif the doors are open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 91 formore information.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following choices:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allows youto select the amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on. This happens afterthe key is turned from RUN to OFF.

206

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 91for more information.

207



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to aloud level.



REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using your Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 91 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following choices:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



208

FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factorydefault settings.

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following choices:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the FEATURESETTINGS menu.

Press the customization button until FEATURESETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears inthe DIC display. Press the set/reset button to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning of theFEATURE SETTINGS menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

209

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 246. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 246.

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

210

While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 110 for more information.

Setting the Time(Without Date Display)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numberedone through six, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the time byfollowing these steps:

1. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers will begin flashing on the display.

2. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time. Instead of using the tune knob, youcan also press the SEEK, FWD (forward),or REV (reverse) buttons to adjust the time.

3. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stopafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

211

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turnthe tune knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, to adjust theselected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clockbutton when the radio is on. The date with displaytimes out after a few seconds and goes back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

212

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turnthe tune knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, to adjust theselected setting.

The date does not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENUbutton and then the clock button when the radio ison. The date with display times out after a fewseconds and goes back to the normal radioand time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

213

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio goes to the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. The volume canstill be adjusted by using the volume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

214

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. When that pushbutton is pressed andreleased, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor treble, press the tune knob or the pushbuttonslocated under the BASS/TREB display, untilthe desired tone control label displays. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the setting. Adjust the settingby pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward), orREV (reverse) buttons. The current bass or treblelevel displays. If a station’s frequency is weak,or has static, decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual appears on the display or startto manually adjust the bass or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

215

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label displays.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the setting. The setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, orREV buttons.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.

Loc (Locked): This message displays whilethe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 242 for more information.

216

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back intothe player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is heldor pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thispushbutton to advance playback quickly within atrack. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this pushbutton to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track displays.

217

RDM (Random): With the random setting, youcan listen to CD tracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from theCD you are listening to in random order.The random icon displays.

2. Press this button again to turn off randomplay. The random icon disappears from thedisplay.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

• To repeat the track you are listening to,press and release the RPT button. An arrowsymbol displays. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for a few seconds.An arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again toturn off repeat play. When repeat is off, thesymbol no longer displays.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number displays while a CD is inthe player. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice such as a portable audio player.

218

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD ejects, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD-R.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer while reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 246 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

219

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio withSix-Disc CD (MP3) similar

220

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersdisplay. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcastincorrect information that causes the radio featuresto work improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channelsincluding music, news, sports, talk, traffic/weather(U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and textinformation that includes song title and artist name.A service fee is required in order to receive theXM™ service. For more information, contact XM™;In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada atwww.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR(438-9677).

221

Playing the RadioO (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way, thevolume level should sound about the same asyou drive. To activate SCV:1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.2. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM

(automatic volume) label on the radio display.4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed

Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrowto go to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

222

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) canappear. Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label displays.

While information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is in PARK (P). Tuneto your favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls if the vehiclehas this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 246.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

223

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsdisplay. Continue pressing to highlight the desiredlabel, or press the pushbutton positioned underthe desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. The highlighted setting can also beadjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD(forward) or REV (reverse) button until the desiredlevels are obtained. If a station’s frequency isweak, or has static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB (treble)label for more than two seconds. A beep soundsand the level adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

224

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. The highlighted settingcan also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button untilthe desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations while the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

225

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category displays or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your dealerfor service.

Locked: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 238 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

226

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 242 for more information.


227




Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegin playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the next track. If eitherSEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

228

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be played in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs in asix-disc CD player. To use random, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label displays.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbutton again toturn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-discCD player, press and hold the LOADbutton. A beep sounds and Load All Discsdisplays. Insert one or more discs partway intothe slot of the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in asix-disc CD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDMlabel until Randomize All Discs displays. Pressthe same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device Founddisplays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have theMP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. Formore information on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 231later in this section.

229

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message displaysand/or the CD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer while reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 246 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need tomake additional volume adjustments from theportable device.

230

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Aux Input Device Found displays.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album can displaywhen files are recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio and ignores theMP3 files. Pressing the CAT (category) buttontoggles between compressed and uncompressedaudio format.

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure the CD does not have more than50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files to readand play.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

231

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, ora combination of a large number of filesand folders, or playlists can cause the playerto be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display, potentially getting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum cannot be accessed.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder is not numbered ordisplayed.

232

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not function ona CD-R that was recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searches playlists (Px)first and then goes to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

233

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the last page of textand the extension of the filename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, you do nothave playlist editing capability using the radio.These playlists are treated as special folderscontaining compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 242 for more information.

234





Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. For theSix-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

235

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files can be played on the CD-R in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order from theCD-R that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

236

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio might beginplaying while it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan is finished, theCD-R begins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3 files in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R andbegins playing MP3 files by that artist. If youwant to listen to MP3 files by another artist, pressthe pushbutton located below either arrowbutton. The CD goes to the next or previous artistin alphabetical order. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below theSort By label. From the sort screen, push one of

the buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the albumname displays on the second line betweenthe arrows and songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs from that albumhave played, the player moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return tonormal MP3 playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon and amessage showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, No Aux Input Device Founddisplays.

237

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

238

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theft Locked Theftlock® active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messagedisplays after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

239

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved toa different vehicle, it does not operate and LOCKEDdisplays.With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio cannotoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel ControlsThe audio steeringwheel controls may bedifferent dependingon your vehicle’soptions. Some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the system. Press andrelease this button again, to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and holdthis button for longer than one second to interactwith the OnStar system. See the OnStar®

System on page 125 in this manual for moreinformation.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD, andAUX jack.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station and stay there.

240

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tallbuildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of theXM™ signal for a period of time. The radio maydisplay NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.

241

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of the rear window isnot scratched and that the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface is damaged, it couldinterfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radioreception, the antenna connector at the top-centerof the rear window needs to be properly attached tothe post on the glass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will not be coveredby your warranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

242

Because this antenna is built into your rearwindow, there is a reduced risk of damage causedby car washes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that you do not damagethe grid lines for the AM-FM antenna. Thereis enough space between the lines to attach acellular telephone antenna without interfering withradio reception.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

243

✍ NOTES

244

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ... 246Defensive Driving ...................................... 246Drunken Driving ........................................ 247Control of a Vehicle .................................. 250Braking ...................................................... 250Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 251Braking in Emergencies ............................. 253Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 254Steering .................................................... 255Off-Road Recovery .................................... 258Passing ..................................................... 258Loss of Control .......................................... 260Driving at Night ......................................... 261Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 262City Driving ............................................... 265

Freeway Driving ........................................ 266Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 267Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 268Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 268Winter Driving ........................................... 270If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 276Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 276Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 277

Towing ........................................................ 282Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 282Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 282Towing a Trailer ........................................ 284

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

245

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 18.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

246

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

247

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body water thanmen. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higherBAC level than a man of her same body weight willwhen each has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

248

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

249

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 254.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 296.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 177.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

250

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panelcluster will come onbriefly when youstart your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this test isgoing on, and you may even notice that your brakepedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

251

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

252

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Yourwheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeezethe brakes hard without locking the wheels. If youhear or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brakepedal. This will help you retain steering control. Ifyou do have ABS, it is different. See Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 251.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

253

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may be equipped with a TractionControl System that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it senses that one or both ofthe front wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system reducesengine power and may also upshift the transaxleand apply the front brakes to limit wheel spin.

This light will flash whenyour Traction ControlSystem is limiting wheelspin. See TractionControl System (TCS)Warning Light onpage 179.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control Light on page 185.

The Traction Control System operates in alltransaxle shift lever positions. But the system canupshift the transaxle only as high as the shiftlever position you’ve chosen, so you should usethe lower gears only when necessary. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 113.

The SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL messagewill appear in the Driver Information (DIC) tolet you know if there is a problem with the system.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 195.When this message appears, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the TractionControl System on. But you can turn the system offif you ever need to.

You should turn the system off if your vehicle evergets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If Your Vehicleis Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 276.

254

To turn the system offor on, press the tractioncontrol button locatednear the exteriorlamp control.

When you turn the system off, a chime will soundand a TRACTION CONTROL OFF message willappear in the DIC. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 195 for more information. If theTraction Control System is limiting wheel spin whenyou press the button to turn the system off, thetraction control system warning light will come onand the system will turn off right away.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The Traction ControlSystem warning light should go off.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 296 for more information.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.

Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

255

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will want to goslower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


256

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock yourwheels.

See Braking on page 250. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

257

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing patterns. If you have anydoubt whatsoever about making a successfulpass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates itis all right to pass, providing the road ahead is

258

clear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pull

out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

259

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid arebest handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

260

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark.

261

When you are faced with severe glare, as from adriver who does not lower the high beams, ora vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down alittle. Avoid staring directly into the approachingheadlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

262

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They maynot work as well in a quick stop and maycause pulling to one side. You could losecontrol of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles, orother vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

263

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle.



If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 349.

264

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 266.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

265

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

266

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you caneasily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

267

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

268

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

269

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in the trunk.

Also see Tires on page 349.

270

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

271

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

272

If your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), it will improve your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. Even though your vehiclehas a traction system you will want to slow downand adjust your driving to the road conditions.Under certain conditions, you may want to turn theTCS off, such as when driving through deep snowand loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion atlower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 254.

If your vehicle does not have TCS, accelerategently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spinand polish the surface under the tires even more.

Unless your vehicle has the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), you will want to brake very gently,too. If your vehicle does have ABS, see Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 251.ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when youmake a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether yourvehicle has ABS or not, you will want to beginstopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide,let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedaldown steadily to get the most traction you can.

Remember, unless your vehicle has ABS, if youbrake so hard that the wheels stop rolling,your vehicle will just slide. Brake so the wheelsalways keep rolling and you can still steer.

• Whatever your vehicle’s braking system, allowgreater following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

273

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

274

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot seeit or smell it, so you might not know it is inyour vehicle. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking your exhaust pipe. Andcheck around again from time to time to besure snow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run the engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it goa little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

275

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spinthe wheels too fast while shifting the transaxleback and forth, you can destroy the transaxle.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 276.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 370.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you should turnthe traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 254. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) anda forward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out.If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 282.

276

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry,the Tire and Loading Information label andthe Vehicle Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post(striker). The Tire and Loading Information labellists the number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds. The vehicle capacity weightincludes the weight of all occupants, cargo, andall nonfactory-installed options.

Label Example

277

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 349 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 357.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 284 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

278

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

279



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

Example 3

280

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,spread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse are put inside the vehicle, they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

281

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 428.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle—such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 267.

282

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall four wheels on the ground. If your vehiclemust be towed, you should use a dolly. See“Dolly Towing” following for more information.

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

283

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in thissection. Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,durability and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to beused properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

284

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not onlywhere you live but also where you’ll be driving.A good source for this information can bestate or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can aska hitch dealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle isdriven. Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(454 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

285

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at:

Chevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. And ifyou tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 277 for more information about your vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weigh-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.

286

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theTire-Loading Information label, See Loading YourVehicle on page 277. Then be sure you don’t goover the GVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? Ifyou do, then be sure to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you don’t sealthem, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 121. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sureto read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. Do not tryto tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If youdo, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.

287

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform (and attachments), safety chains,electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

288

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may needadditional wiring. Check with your dealer. Thearrows on your instrument panel will flash wheneveryou signal a turn or lane change. Properly hookedup, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling otherdrivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, youmay think drivers behind you are seeingyour signal when they are not. It’s important tocheck occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbsare still working.

289

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

Notice: When the outside temperature isabove 100° F (38° C) and/or there is a steep,continuous grade, the recommended speedwhen towing is 55 mph (88 km/h) or less.Extended higher than normal engine andtransaxle temperatures may damage yourvehicle.

You may want to drive in THIRD (3), insteadof DRIVE (D).

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet.2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer

wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release

the regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

290

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,drive belts, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If you’retrailering, it’s a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 323.

291

✍ NOTES

292

Service ........................................................ 296Accessories and Modifications ................... 296California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 297Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 297Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ...................................... 298Fuel ............................................................. 298

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 298Gasoline Specifications .............................. 299California Fuel ........................................... 299Additives ................................................... 300Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ............................ 301Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 302Filling the Tank ......................................... 303Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 305

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 306Hood Release ........................................... 307Engine Compartment Overview .................. 308Engine Oil ................................................. 311Engine Oil Life System .............................. 314Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 316Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 317Engine Coolant .......................................... 320Pressure Cap ............................................ 323Engine Overheating ................................... 323Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 325Cooling System ......................................... 326Power Steering Fluid ................................. 331Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 332Brakes ...................................................... 333Battery ...................................................... 336Jump Starting ............................................ 337

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

293

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 342Bulb Replacement ....................................... 342

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 342Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 343Taillamps, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 345Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 345License Plate Lamp ................................... 346Replacement Bulbs ................................... 346

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 347Tires ............................................................ 349

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 350Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 354Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 357Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 358

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 362When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 364Buying New Tires ...................................... 364Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 366Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 367Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 368Wheel Replacement .................................. 368Tire Chains ............................................... 370If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 371Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 372Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 373Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 375Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 382Compact Spare Tire .................................. 384


294

Appearance Care ........................................ 385Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 385Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 386Leather ...................................................... 387Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 388Care of Safety Belts .................................. 388Weatherstrips ............................................ 388Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 389Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 389Finish Care ............................................... 389Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 390Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 390Tires ......................................................... 391Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 391Finish Damage .......................................... 392Underbody Maintenance ............................ 392

Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 392Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 393

Vehicle Identification .................................. 394Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 394Service Parts Identification Label ............... 394

Electrical System ........................................ 395Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 395Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 395Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 395Power Windows and Other

Power Options ....................................... 395Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 395Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 396Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 397

Capacities and Specifications .................... 400


295

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

296

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 441.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 82.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 418.

297

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN atthe top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 394.

If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VINCode K only), you may use either regularunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containingup to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel E85(85% Ethanol) on page 301. In all other engines,use only regular unleaded gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneFor all vehicles except those with the 5.3L V8engine (VIN Code C), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher.If the octane rating is less than 87, you may noticean audible knocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,your engine needs service.

298

If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VINCode C), use premium unleaded gasoline with aposted octane rating of 91 or higher. You mayalso use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s accelerationmay be slightly reduced, and you may notice aslight audible knocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock. If the octane is less than87, you may notice a heavy knocking noise whenyou drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 300 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 181. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

299

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must notbe used in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

300

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)The 8th digit of your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) shows the code letter or numberthat identifies your engine. You will find the VIN atthe top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 394.

If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine (VINCode K only), you may use either regular unleadedgasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85); also see Fuel on page 298. In allother engines, including the 3.5L V6 (VIN Code N),use only regular unleaded gasoline.

Only vehicles that have the 3.5L V6 engine(VIN Code K) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E85).General Motors encourages the use of E85in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanolin E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is madefrom renewable sources such as corn andother crops.

Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanolfuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Departmentof Energy has an alternative fuels website(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find E85 fuel. Thosestations that do have E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if theethanol content is greater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798. By definition, this meansthat fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol contentbetween 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tankwith fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveability and couldcause the check engine light to come on.

301

To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, theE85 fuel must be formulated properly for yourclimate according to ASTM specification D 5798.If you have trouble starting on E85, it may bebecause your E85 fuel is not properly formulatedfor your climate. If this happens, switching togasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel tankmay improve starting. For good starting andheater efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mixin the fuel tank should contain no more than70% ethanol. It is best not to alternate repeatedlybetween gasoline and E85. If you do switchfuels, it is recommended that you add asmuch fuel as possible — do not add less thanthree gallons (11 L) when refueling. You shoulddrive the vehicle immediately after refueling forat least seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle toadapt to the change in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline,so you will need to refill your fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than when you are usinggasoline. See Filling the Tank on page 303.

Notice: Some additives are not compatiblewith E85 fuel and may harm your vehicle’s fuelsystem. Damage caused by additives wouldnot be covered by your new vehicle warranty.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

302

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Ifthe vehicle has E85 fuel capability, a yellow capwith the words “E85/gasoline” can be seen.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring init; if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

303

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap on thehook on the inside of the fuel door.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned.Fuel can spray out on you if you openthe fuel cap too quickly. This spray canhappen if your tank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for any hiss noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 389.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 181.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel capis not properly installed. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 195 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flowof fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 181.

304

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged ifthis occurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it isinside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk,pickup bed, or on any surface otherthan the ground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

305

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can startup and injure you even when the engineis not running. Keep hands, clothing,and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

306

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interiorhood release handlewith this symbolon it. It is locatedto the left ofthe parking brakepedal.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle andrelease the secondary hood latch, locatednear the center of the hood front, by pushingthe latch to the right.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

307

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, this is what you will see:

308

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 332.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 336.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 397.D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 337.E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “Checking

Coolant” under Cooling System on page 326.F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 323.G. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 331.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 311.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 311.

J. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transaxle Fluid on page 317.

K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 333.

L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 316.

309

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, this is what you will see:

310

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 332.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 336.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 397.D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 337.E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 323.F. Power Steering Fluid Cap. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 331.G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 311.H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine

Oil” under Engine Oil on page 311.I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out of

View). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transaxle Fluid on page 317.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 333.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 316.

L. Coolant Recovery Tank. See “CheckingCoolant” under Cooling System on page 326.

Engine OilIf the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL messageappears in the Driver Information Center (DIC),it means you need to check the engine oillevel right away. For more information, seeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 195.You should check the engine oil level regularly;this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

311

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use theright kind. This section explains what kind ofoil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications on page 400.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 308 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

V6 Engine

V8 Engine

312

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094MYour vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute Certified ForGasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure touse the recommended oil can result in enginedamage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

313

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 195. Change your oil assoon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the oil life system maynot indicate that an oil change is necessary forover a year. However, your engine oil andfilter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealerhas GM-trained service people who will performthis work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system. It is also important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

314

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message being turned on, reset thesystem.

Always reset the engine oil life to 100% afterevery oil change. It will not reset itself. To resetthe Engine Oil Life System, do the following:

1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button onthe DIC for more than five seconds. The oillife will change to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle, theEngine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose ofoil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.

315

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the driver’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 308 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 406 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filterdo the following:

1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engineair cleaner/filter housing.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.3. Pull out the filter.4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs

through the hinges on the housing.

6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing tolock the cover in place.

316

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to beburned. The air cleaner not only cleans theair; it helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and the enginebackfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working onthe engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listedin Additional Required Services on page 409,and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 415.

317

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage the transaxle. Too much can mean thatsome of the fluid could come out and fall onhot engine or exhaust system parts, starting afire. Too little fluid could cause the transaxle tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate readingif you check the transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

318

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle is theblack loop with thissymbol on it. It islocated near therear of the enginecompartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 308 for more information on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. The fluid level must be inthe cross-hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

V6 Engines 5.3L V8 Engine

319

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 415.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into thecross-hatched area on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating or if you needto add coolant to the radiator, see EngineOverheating on page 323.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

320

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at the firstmaintenance service after each 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. With



plain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If coolant needs to be added more than four times ayear, have your dealer check the cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 415 for more information.

321

Checking Coolant

The coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for more information on the location of thecoolant recovery tank.

The vehicle must be on a level surface whenchecking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant levelshould be at the cold fill line or a little higher.The cold fill line is marked with the same symbolas the coolant recovery tank cap.

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty,add coolant to the cooling system through thecoolant fill neck on the engine. See EngineOverheating on page 323.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator. Neverturn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

322

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 326.

Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperature gage and awarning light on the instrument panel that indicatean overheated engine condition. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 180and Engine Coolant Temperature WarningLight on page 179.

In addition, you will find an ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and an ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE messagedisplayed on the vehicle’s Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 195 for more information.

323

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just openthe hood. Stay away from the engine ifyou see or hear steam coming from it.Turn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 325 forinformation on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 325 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

324

If an overheat warning occurs without any sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the heater at the highest setting and thefan at the highest speed and open thewindows as necessary.

If the overheat warning no longer exists, thevehicle can be driven. Just to be safe, drive slowerfor about 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, the vehicle can be driven normally.

If the warning continues, and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the enginefor three minutes while parked. If the warningis still there, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows yourvehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In this mode, youwill notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The coolant temperature gagewill indicate an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheatedengine protection operating mode, to avoidengine damage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 311.

325

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

A. Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling FansC. Coolant Recovery Tank3.5L V6 Engine

5.3L V8 Engine

326

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine, the coolantrecovery tank is located in the rear of the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine,the coolant recovery tank is located in the rear ofthe engine compartment on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 308.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at or above the cold fill line on the coolantrecovery tank. To check the coolant level, lookfor the cold fill line on the side of the coolantrecovery tank that faces the engine. If the level isnot correct, there may be a leak at the pressurecap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in thecooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

327

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, the fansshould be running. If the fans are not running,your vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 325 for informationon driving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner,at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

328

If you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the cold fill line, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 320for more information.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant level in the coolant recoverytank is at the cold fill line, start the vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. Add the proper coolantmixture directly to the cooling system through thecoolant fill neck on the engine, but be sure thesystem is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure,and if you turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — they can come outat high speed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

329

How to Add Coolant to the CoolingSystemNotice: Your engine has a specific coolingsystem drain and fill procedure. Failureto follow this procedure could cause yourengine to overheat and be severely damaged.If your engine’s cooling system needs tobe drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.

1. Remove thepressure capwhen the coolingsystem, includingthe pressurecap and upperradiator hose isno longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans that there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap andremove it.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

3. Fill the cooling system with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. See Engine Coolant onpage 320 for more information aboutthe proper coolant mixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the coldfill line.

6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and thepressure cap. After a day or two of driving,when the engine is cold, check the coolantlevel in the recovery tank. If it is low, refill it tothe cold fill line.

If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantlylow, you should have a dealership servicedepartment inspect the vehicle for leaks.

330

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is locatedtoward the rear of theengine compartment onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 308for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick witha clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewhere within thecross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid isat the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 415.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

331

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidA WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagewill be displayed on the Driver Information Center(DIC) when you need to add windshield washerfluid to your vehicle. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 195 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 308for more information on location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

332

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 308 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well,or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then youwill have too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done onthe brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid,it can spill on the engine. The fluid willburn if the engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and your vehiclecould be damaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 177.

333

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 415.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 389.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

334

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of your braking system — for example, whenyour brake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approvedGM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakesmay no longer work properly. For example, ifsomeone puts in brake linings that are wrong foryour vehicle, the balance between your front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. Thebraking performance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone puts in thewrong replacement brake parts.

335

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 308 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 337 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

336

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other. If they are,it could cause a ground connection you donot want. You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehiclesrolling, set the parking brake firmly on bothvehicles involved in the jump start procedure.Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

337

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on each vehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump starting terminal forthat purpose. The remote positive (+) terminalis located in the engine compartment onthe passenger’s side of the vehicle, onthe underhood fuse block. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 308 formore information on location.

To uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal,remove the fuseblock cover. Youshould always use theremote positive (+)terminal instead of thepositive (+) terminalon the battery.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

338

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), oryou will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

339

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location of the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal location of thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cableto the negative (−) terminal location of thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anythinguntil the next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

340

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminaland Remote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the fuse block cover to its originalposition.

Jumper Cable Removal

341

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the headlamp aim may be affected.Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlampsmay be necessary if it is difficult to see the lanemarkers (for horizontal aim), or if oncomingdrivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 346.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed inthis section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

342

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps

A. SidemarkerB. Low-Beam

Headlamp

C. High-Beam HeadlampD. Parking/Turn

Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Releaseon page 307 for more information.

2. Remove the screw from the headlampassembly.

343

3. Remove the headlamp plastic retainer bypulling it up.

4. Pull the headlamp assembly away from thevehicle and remove the electrical connector.

5. Remove the round dust caps to gain accessto the bulbs.

6. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise andremove it from the retaining ring by pullingit away from the headlamp.

7. Remove the electrical connector from thebulb by raising the lock tab and pulling theconnector away from the bulb’s base.

8. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.

9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallesttab on the bulb base into the matchingnotch in the retaining ring. Turn the bulb aquarter-turn clockwise until it stops.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.

When you reinstall the headlamp assembly,make sure to line up the pin in the headlampassembly with the slot in the vehicle.

344

Taillamps, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps

A. Rear SidemarkerLamp

B. Taillamp/Turn Signaland Stoplamp

C. Taillamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 101for more information.

2. Remove the convenience net, if your vehiclehas one, and then remove it by unhookingthe upper wing nut.

3. Pull the carpet away from the rear of thevehicle.

4. Remove the two remaining wing nuts.

5. Pull the assembly from the vehicle.6. Remove the bulb socket. To do so, press the

tab, turn it counterclockwise and pull it out.7. Pull the old bulb straight out.8. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.9. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the

taillamp assembly.

Back-Up LampsThe back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper.

1. Remove the two screws from the back-uplamp assembly.

2. Pull the assembly from the rear bumper.

345

3. Remove the socket by turning itcounterclockwise and pull it out.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out.

5. Push the new bulb into the socket.

6. Push the socket back into the assembly.Tighten the socket by turning it clockwise.

7. Reinstall the assembly with the two screws.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Turn the lamp assembly counterclockwise andpull the lamp assembly out of the connector.

2. Pull the old bulb from the lamp assembly,keeping the bulb straight as you pull it out.

3. Install the new bulb.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 3157NAK

License Plate Lamp 194

Headlamps

High-Beam H9

Low-Beam H11

Sidemarker Lamp 194

Stoplamps, Taillamps, andTurn Signal Lamp 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

346

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 406 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. Here’s how toremove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip upfrom the blade connecting point, and pull theblade assembly down toward the windshieldto remove it from the wiper arm.

3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper armand snap the clip down into place.

347

To remove and replace the wiper blade elementdo the following:

1. The wiper blade element has two notches atone end which are engaged by the bottomclaw set of the wiper blade. At the notchedend of the wiper blade, pull the wiperblade element from the wiper blade assembly.

2. To replace the element, start at the heel endof the wiper blade, which is the end nearestto the base of the wiper arm, and slidethe wiper blade element, notched end last,into the wiper blade claw sets.

3. To engage the last claw into the notchedend of the wiper blade element, squeezethe wiper blade element at the notched area,and push the wiper blade element so theclaw fits into the notch.

4. Be sure the two wiper blade element notchesare engaged by the last claw set, and that allthe other claws are properly engaged in theslots of the wiper blade element on both sides.

A. Correct InstallationB. Incorrect Installation

For the proper type and size windshield wiperblades, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 416.

348

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty andwhere to obtain service, see your GM Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 277.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 357.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, orif your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

349

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

350

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 367.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 384 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 371.

Compact Spare Tire Example

351

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to supportthat load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 357.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

352

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

353

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 357.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 277.

354

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 277.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 277.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 277.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle. Theside of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

355

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 357 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 277.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 364.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 367.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 277.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 277.

356

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). Thislabel shows your vehicle’s original equipment tiresand the correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended coldtire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 277. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 384.

357

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,except for the spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel cluster,and at the same time a message to checkthe pressure in a specific tire will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) display. Thelow tire pressure warning symbol on the instrumentpanel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSUREmessage will appear at each ignition cycle until thetires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can beviewed by the driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Operation and Displays on page 187and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 195.

358

The low tire pressure warning light may come onin cool weather when the vehicle is first started,and then turn off as you start to drive. This maybe an early indicator that the air pressure inthe tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with atire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tirepressure telltale whenone or more of yourtires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

359

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 277,for an example of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 357.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about alow tire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 362 and Tires on page 349.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehiclehas Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealantcan damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.If the system detects a missing or inoperablesensor, an error message SERVICE TIREMONITOR SYSTEM will be shown on the DICdisplay. If you have replaced a tire/wheel assemblywithout transferring the TPMS sensors, the errormessage will be displayed. Once you re-install theTPMS sensors, the error message should gooff. See your GM dealer for service if all TPMSsensors are installed and the error messagecomes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires,the identification codes will need to be matchedto the new tire/wheel position. The sensorsare matched, to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’sside front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, anddriver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostictool. See your GM dealer for service.

360

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match each tire andwheel position. If it takes longer than two minutes tomatch any tire and wheel position, the matchingprocess stops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the LEARN TIRE POSITIONSmessage displays.

4. Press the set/reset button to allow the systemto learn the tire positions. The horn will soundtwice to indicate the receiver is ready, andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messagewill display. The TPMS system is ready forthe sensor matching process to begin.

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. Thehorn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds tosound, confirms that the sensor identificationcode has been matched to the tire/wheelposition. To decrease the tire’s air-pressureuse the pointed end of the valve cap, apencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver’s side rear tire, the tire learning processends. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

361

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complieswith RSS-210 of Industry and ScienceCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See WhenIt Is Time for New Tires on page 364 and WheelReplacement on page 368 for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 406 for scheduled rotationintervals.

362

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in yourtire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and rear inflation pressures as shownon the Tire and Loading Information label.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 357and Loading Your Vehicle on page 277.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See“TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” underTire Pressure Monitor System on page 358.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 400.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 372.

363

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC Spec number will be followed by anMS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 350 for additional information.

364

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle maynot handle properly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 384.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem may give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tiresmay give a low-pressure warning that is higher orlower than the proper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 358.

365

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 277,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a differentsize than your original equipment wheels andtires, this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance torollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, tractioncontrol, and electronic stability control, theperformance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 364 andAccessories and Modifications on page 296for additional information.

366

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

367

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

368

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 372 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use anew GM original equipment wheel.

369

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/55R17 orP235/50R18 size tires, do not use tirechains, there is not enough clearance.Tire chains used on a vehicle withoutthe proper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension, orother vehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause you tolose control of your vehicle and youor others may be injured in a crash.Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions.Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.



To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust, or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, anddo not spin your wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install themon the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size otherthan P225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, usetire chains only where legal and only whenyou must. Use only SAE Class S-type chainsthat are the proper size for your tires. Installthem on the front tires and tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hearthe chains contacting your vehicle, stopand retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving too fastor spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

370

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

371

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turnon your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 148 formore information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

372

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located inthe trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 101 formore information.

2. Turn the center nuton the compactspare tire covercounterclockwise toremove it. Thenremove the cover.

3. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 384 for more information.

373

4. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwiseand remove it. Then remove the jack andwrench.

The tools you will need to change a tire includethe jack (A), extension and protection guide (B),and wheel wrench (C).

374

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYour vehicle may have aluminum wheels withexposed wheel nuts. Use the wheel wrench toloosen all the wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.

Or, your vehicle may have steel wheel covers.

To remove the steel wheel covers and wheel nutcaps, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheelwrench in a counterclockwise direction. If needed,you can finish loosening them with your fingers.The plastic nut caps will not come off.

Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pryalong the edge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover could be sharp, sodo not try to remove it with your bare hands.Do not drop the cover or lay it face down, as itcould become scratched or damaged.

375

Once you have removed the wheel cover, use thefollowing procedure to remove the flat tire andinstall the spare tire.

1. It is recommendedthat you do asafety check beforepreceding. SeeChanging a FlatTire on page 372 formore information.

Turn the wheel wrench once on each wheelnut to loosen them. Do not remove them yet.

2. For all wheel types, find the jackinglocation using the diagram above and thecorresponding hoisting notches located onthe bottom side of the plastic molding.The notches in the plastic molding are markedwith a triangle shape to help you find them.The front location is about 7.0 inches (17.7 cm)from the rear edge of the front wheel well.The rear location is about 4.5 inches (11.4 cm)from the rear edge of the wheel well.

3. Put the compact spare tire near you.

376

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

377

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire. 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle

clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground to install the compact spare tire.

5. Remove all wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

378

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth ora paper towel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brush later, ifneeded, to get all the rust or dirt off.

6. Remove any rustor dirt from thewheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

7. Install the compact spare tire.

379

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

8. Reinstall the wheelnuts with therounded end of thenuts toward thewheel. Tighteneach nut by handuntil the wheelis held againstthe hub.

9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

380

2

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 400for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 400 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

10. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put the wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until you have the flat tire repairedor replaced.

381

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

After the compact spare tire has been installedon the vehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use the extension withthe protector, located in the foam holder,to help avoid wheel surface damage.

To store a full-size tire, do the following:

A. RetainerB. Flat TireC. ProtectorD. Bolt ExtensionE. Wing NutF. JackG. Wheel WrenchH. Extension and

Protective GuideI. Bolt Screw

Full Size Flat Tire

382

1. Install the tools in their original location in thetrunk area and secure.

2. Place the tire valve stem facing down andthe protector/guide placed through awheel bolt hole.

3. Remove the protector and attach the retainersecurely.

4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.

When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, putthe protector back in the foam holder.

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tireon page 384. Use the following as a guidefor storing the compact spare tire and tools.

A. RetainerB. CoverC. Compact Spare TireD. Wing NutE. JackF. Wheel WrenchG. Extension and

Protective GuideH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare Tire

383

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airafter a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your tripand have your full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. You must calibrate the tireinflation monitor system after installing or removingthe compact spare. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 358 for more information.The system may not work correctly when thecompact spare is installed on the vehicle.

Of course, it is best to replace your spare with afull-size tire as soon as you can. Your sparewill last longer and be in good shape in case youneed it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on your compact spare.

384

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

385

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soilwith a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until no more canbe removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much aspossible and then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

386

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil andgently rub toward the center. Continuecleaning, using a clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used. Allow the leather todry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Neveruse steam to clean leather. Never use spot liftersor spot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leatherand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

387

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

388

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 393. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 389.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 393.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

389

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

390

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

391

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,GM will repair, at no charge to the owner,the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or 12,000miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whicheveroccurs first.

392

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

393

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpfulif you ever need to order parts. On this label,you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

394

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 82.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp circuit is protected by individualfuses in the underhood fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the fuse to blow. If thishappens, have your headlamp system checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a fuse.If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc.,the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by some electrical problem,have it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsA circuit breaker in the instrument panel fuseblock protects the power windows and other poweraccessories. When the current load is too heavy,the circuit breaker opens and closes, protectingthe circuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

395

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The fuse block is located on the passenger side ofthe vehicle in the carpet molding. Remove thefuse block door to access the fuses.

Fuses UsagePWR/SEAT Power SeatsPWR/WNDW Power WindowRAP Retained Accessory PowerHTD/SEAT Heated SeatsAUX Auxiliary OutletsAMP AmplifierS/ROOF SunroofXM XM™ RadioCNSTR CanisterDR/LCK Door LocksPWR/MIR Power MirrorsAIRBAG AirbagsTRUNK TrunkTRUNK Trunk Relay

396

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 308 for more information on location.

Fuses UsageLT PARK Driver’s Side Parking LampRT PARK Passenger’s Side Parking Lamp

Fuses UsageFAN 1 Cooling Fan 1SPARE Spare

397

Fuses UsageSPARE SpareAIRBAG/DISPLAY Airbag, Display

TRANS TransaxleECM IGN Engine Control Module, IgnitionRT T/SIG Passenger’s Side Turn SignalLT T/SIG Driver’s Side Turn SignalDRL 1 Daytime Running Lamps 1HORN HornSPARE SparePWR DROP/CRNK Power Drop, Crank

STRG WHL Steering Wheel

ECM/TCM Engine Control Module,Transaxle Control Module

RVC SEN Regulated Voltage Control SensorRADIO Audio SystemFOG LAMPS Fog LampsSPARE SpareBATT 4 Battery 4ONSTAR OnStar®

STRTR StarterABS MTR1 Anti-lock Brake System Motor 1BATT 3 Battery 3

Fuses UsageWSW Windshield WiperHTD MIR Heated MirrorSPARE SpareBATT 1 Battery 1ABS MTR2 Anti-lock Brake System Motor 2AIR PUMP Air PumpBATT 2 Battery 2INT LIGHTS Interior LampsINT LTS/PNL DIM

Interior Lamps, InstrumentPanel Dimmer

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorAIR SOL AIR (Air Injection Reactor) SolenoidAUX PWR Auxiliary PowerBCM Body Control ModuleCHMSL/BCK-UP

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,Back-up Lamps

DISPLAY Display

ETC/ECM Electronic Throttle Control,Engine Control Module

INJ 1 Injector 1EMISSIONS 1 Emissions 1INJ 2 Injector 2EMISSIONS 2 Emissions 2RT SPOT Right Spot

398

Fuses UsageLT SPOT Left SpotHDLP MDL Headlamp ModuleDRL 2 Daytime Running Lamps 2FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2FUEL/PUMP Fuel PumpWPR WiperLT LO BEAM Driver’s Side Low-BeamRT LO BEAM Passenger’s Side Low-BeamLT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-BeamRT HI BEAM Passenger’s Side High-Beam

Relay UsageSTRTR StarterREAR DEFOG Rear DefoggerFAN 1 Cooling Fan 1FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorFAN 3 Cooling Fan 3FUEL/PUMP Fuel PumpPWR/TRN Powertrain

399

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 415 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerantcharge amount, see the refrigerant

caution label located under the hood.See your dealer for more information.

Automatic Transaxle 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Cooling System Including Reservoir

3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel 10.1 qt 9.6 L

5.3L V8 Engine 13.3 qt 12.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter

3.5L V6, 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel 4.0 qt 3.8 L

5.3L V8 Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L

400

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank

3.5L Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,VT, NY, MA (see your dealer for bordering states) 17.0 gal 64.4 L

3.5L Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in allother states (see your dealer for more information) 17.5 gal 66.2 L

5.3L Engines sold new in all states 17.5 gal 66.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Nm

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3.5L V6 N Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.5L Flexible Fuel V6 K Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

5.3L V8 C Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

401

✍ NOTES

402

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 404Introduction ............................................... 404Maintenance Requirements ........................ 404Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 404Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 405Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 406Additional Required Services ..................... 409Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 410Owner Checks and Services ..................... 412

At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 412At Least Once a Month ............................. 412At Least Once a Year ............................... 413Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 415Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 416Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 417Maintenance Record .................................. 418

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

403

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?The Plan supplements your new vehiclewarranties. See your Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

404

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:• carry passengers and cargo within

recommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 277.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 298.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 406 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 409 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 410 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehiclecan be dangerous. In trying to do somejobs, you can be seriously injured. Do yourown maintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper toolsand equipment for the job. If you have anydoubt, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer tohave a qualified technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

405

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 441.

Owner Checks and Services on page 412 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 415 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 416.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required foryour vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soonas possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer has GM-trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 314 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

406

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on10 months or more since the last service or ifthe message has not come on at all for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 311. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 314. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 316. See footnote (m). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 362 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 412.

• •

407

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

Replace passenger compartment air filter, if equipped. See footnote (g). •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

408

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 316. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (n).

•

409

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light andall belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

410

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for thebody doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glovebox door, console door, and any folding seathardware. More frequent lubrication maybe required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 320 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) Check throttle system for interference orbinding and for damaged or missing parts. Replaceparts as needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid ifneeded.

(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

411

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 415.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 311 forfurther details.Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 320 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 357. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 372.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 362.

412

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 117.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The vehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 117.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

413

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

414

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 311.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 320.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

415

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourGM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number AC Delco PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 10350737 A2962C

Engine Oil Filter

3.5L V6 and 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines 89017342 PF61

5.3L V8 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132

Spark Plugs

3.5L V6 and 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines 12591131 41-100

5.3L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s – 22 inches (55.0 cm) 19120353 —

Passenger’s-Driver’s – 22 inches (55.0 cm) 19120354 —

416

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.5L V6 and 3.5L V6 Flexible Fuel Engines

5.3L V8 Engine

417

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 404.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 412 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

418

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



419

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



420

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 422Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 422Online Owner Center ................................. 425Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 426Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 426GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 427Roadside Assistance Program ................... 428Courtesy Transportation ............................. 432Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 434Collision Damage Repair ........................... 436

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 440Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 440Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 440Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 440Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 441

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

421

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved byyour dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is

available from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

(kilometers).When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

422

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, you should file with the BBBAuto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

423

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

424

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

425

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

426

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

427

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(about $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres in Canada).Service to provide diesel may be restricted.For safety reasons, propane and otheralternative fuels will not be provided throughthis service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle will not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

428

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a sparetire, installation of the tire in good condition willbe covered at no charge. The customer isresponsible for the repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

429

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receipt to RoadsideAssistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

430

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

431

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty and is availableonly at participating dealers. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and Owner AssistanceInformation” furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,you should contact your dealer and requestan appointment. By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, your dealer canhelp minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

432

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for

U.S. customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

433

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to theterms and conditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if the vehicle has theAnti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provide anti-lockbraking and to help the driver control the vehicle indifficult driving situations. Some information may bestored during regular operations to facilitate repairof detected malfunctions; other information isstored only in a crash event by computer systems,such as those commonly called Event DataRecorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed,safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbagperformance, and the severity of a collision.

434

This information has been used to improve vehiclecrash performance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles and drivingsafety. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do not recordsounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

435

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.

A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

436

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of.Move your vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 428 for moreinformation.

437

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select aGM dealer or a private collision repair facilityto fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, you willhave to feel comfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

438

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but youmust live with the repair. Depending on yourpolicy limits, your insurance company mayinitially value the repair using aftermarket parts.

Discuss this with your repair professional, andinsist on Genuine GM parts. Remember ifyour vehicle is leased you may be obligated tohave the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of the repairand parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

439

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify General Motors. Please call theChevrolet Customer Assistance Center at1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

440

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletincontains instructions to assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

441

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

442

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 296Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 162Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-

Equipped Vehicle ....................................... 83Additives, Fuel ............................................ 300Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 395Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 316Air Conditioning ........................................... 164Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 175Readiness Light ....................................... 174

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 434

Airbag System ............................................... 68Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 75Passenger Sensing System ....................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 76When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 73Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 71

Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 242

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem .................................................... 243

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 251Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 178Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 390Care of Safety Belts ................................ 388Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 392Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 389Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 385Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 386Finish Care .............................................. 389Finish Damage ......................................... 392Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 388Leather .................................................... 387Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 391Tires ........................................................ 391Underbody Maintenance ........................... 392Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 393Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 389Weatherstrips ........................................... 388Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 390

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 164Audio System(s) .......................................... 210

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 240Backglass Antenna ................................... 242

443

Audio System(s) (cont.)Care of Your CD Player ........................... 242Care of Your CDs .................................... 242Radio with CD ................................ 214, 220Setting the Time .............................. 211, 212Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 240Understanding Radio Reception ............... 241XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 243

Automatic Door Lock ................................... 100Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 317Operation ................................................. 113

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 242Battery ........................................................ 336

Electric Power Management ..................... 161Run-Down Protection ............................... 162

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 267Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 251Emergencies ............................................ 253Parking .................................................... 117System Warning Light .............................. 177

Brakes ........................................................ 333Braking ....................................................... 250

Braking in Emergencies ............................... 253Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 108Bulb Replacement ....................................... 342

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 345Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 342Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 342Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 343License Plate Lamps ................................ 346Replacement Bulbs .................................. 346Taillamps, Stoplamps and Back-Up

Lamps .................................................. 345Buying New Tires ........................................ 364

CCalibration ................................................... 193California Fuel ............................................. 299California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 297Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 400Carbon Monoxide .............. 101, 121, 270, 284Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 388Your CD Player ........................................ 242Your CDs ................................................. 242

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 231

444

Center Console Storage Area ...................... 140Chains, Tire ................................................. 370Charging System Light ................................ 177Check

Engine Light ............................................ 181Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 306Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 392Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 47Infants and Young Children ........................ 44Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 53Older Children ........................................... 41Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 60Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 63Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 51

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 164Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 390Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 389Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 386Finish Care .............................................. 389Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 385Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 388

Cleaning (cont.)Leather .................................................... 387Tires ........................................................ 391Underbody Maintenance ........................... 392Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 389Weatherstrips ........................................... 388Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 390

Climate Control System ............................... 164Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 169Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 168

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 436Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 36Compact Spare Tire .................................... 384Compass ..................................................... 193Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 105Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 250Convenience Net ......................................... 141Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 180Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 179Heater, Engine ......................................... 112

Cooling System ........................................... 326Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 159Cruise Control ............................................. 153Cruise Control Light .................................... 185Cupholder(s) ................................................ 140

445

Customer Assistance InformationCourtesy Transportation ........................... 432Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 426Customer Assistance Offices .................... 426Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 422GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 427Reporting Safety Defects to General

Motors .................................................. 440Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 440Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 440Roadside Assistance Program .................. 428Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 441

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 158Defensive Driving ........................................ 246Delayed Entry Lighting ................................ 160Delayed Exit Lighting ................................... 160Delayed Headlamps .................................... 157

DIC Compass .............................................. 193Disc, MP3 ................................................... 231Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 297Dome Lamp ................................................ 159Door

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 100Locks ......................................................... 98Power Door Locks ..................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 100

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 24

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 186DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 187DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 203DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 195

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 261City .......................................................... 265Defensive ................................................. 246Drunken ................................................... 247Freeway ................................................... 266Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 268In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 262Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 276Winter ...................................................... 270

446

EEasy Entry Seat ............................................ 15Electric Power Management ........................ 161Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 395Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 395Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 395Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 396Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 395Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 397Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 395

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 316Battery ..................................................... 336Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 181Coolant .................................................... 320Coolant Heater ......................................... 112Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 180Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 179Drive Belt Routing .................................... 417Engine Compartment Overview ................ 308Exhaust ................................................... 121Oil ........................................................... 311Oil Life System ........................................ 314Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 325

Engine (cont.)Overheating ............................................. 323Starting .................................................... 110

Entry Lighting .............................................. 160Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 434Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 40Exterior Lamps ............................................ 156

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 316Finish Damage ............................................ 392Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 148Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 151Flat Tire ...................................................... 371Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 372Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 382Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 317Power Steering ........................................ 331Windshield Washer .................................. 332

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 185Fog Lamps .................................................. 158Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 16

447

Fuel ............................................................ 298Additives .................................................. 300California Fuel .......................................... 299E85 (85% Ethanol) ................................... 301Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 305Filling Your Tank ...................................... 303Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 302Gage ....................................................... 185Gasoline Octane ...................................... 298Gasoline Specifications ............................ 299

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 395Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 396Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 397Windshield Wiper ..................................... 395

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 180Fuel ......................................................... 185Speedometer ........................................... 172Tachometer .............................................. 172

Garage Door Opener .......................... 129, 130Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 298Specifications ........................................... 299

Gasoline (cont.)Glove Box ................................................... 140GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 427

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 148Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 342Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 395Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 342Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ................................ 158Delayed ................................................... 157Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 151Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 342Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 343High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 151

Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 164Highbeam On Light ..................................... 185Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 268Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 268

448

HoodChecking Things Under ............................ 306Release ................................................... 307

Horn ............................................................ 148How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 24

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 109Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 44Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 357Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 146Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 159Cluster ..................................................... 171

JJump Starting .............................................. 337

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 90Keys ............................................................. 89

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 350Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 162Courtesy .................................................. 159Dome ....................................................... 159Electric Power Management ..................... 161Exterior .................................................... 156Fog .......................................................... 158Reading ................................................... 161

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 53

Latches, Seatback ......................................... 14License Plate Lamps ................................... 346Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 174Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 178Brake System Warning ............................. 177Charging System ..................................... 177Cruise Control .......................................... 185Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 179Fog Lamp ................................................ 185Highbeam On .......................................... 185Malfunction Indicator ................................ 181Oil Pressure ............................................. 184Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 175

449

Light (cont.)Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 173Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 173Security ................................................... 184TCS Warning Light .................................. 179Tire Pressure ........................................... 180Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ..... 179

LightingDelayed Entry .......................................... 160Delayed Exit ............................................ 160Entry ........................................................ 160Parade Dimming ...................................... 161

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 277Lockout Protection ....................................... 100Locks

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 100Door .......................................................... 98Lockout Protection ................................... 100Power Door ............................................... 99Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 100

Loss of Control ........................................... 260Lumbar

Manual Controls .......................................... 9

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 409At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 412At Least Once a Month ............................ 412At Least Once a Year .............................. 413Introduction .............................................. 404Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 410Maintenance Record ................................ 418Maintenance Requirements ...................... 404Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 416Owner Checks and Services .................... 412Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 415Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 406Using ....................................................... 405Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 404

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 181Manual Lumbar Controls ................................. 9Manual Passenger Seat .................................. 8Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 195

450

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® ................................................ 123Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 123Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 123Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 124Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 124Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 124

MP3 ............................................................ 231MyGMLink.com ............................................ 425

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 108Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 416

OOdometer .................................................... 172Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 258Oil

Engine ..................................................... 311Pressure Light .......................................... 184

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 314Older Children, Restraints ............................. 41Online Owner Center ................................... 425OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 125

Other Warning Devices ................................ 148Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 168Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 162Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 124Heated Mirrors ......................................... 124Power Mirrors .......................................... 124

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 325

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 412Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 392Parade Dimming .......................................... 161Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 118Shifting Out of ......................................... 120

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 117Over Things That Burn ............................ 120

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 175Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 169Passenger Sensing System ........................... 77Passing ....................................................... 258PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 106

451

PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 107Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 162Door Locks ................................................ 99Electrical System ..................................... 395Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 110Seat ............................................................ 8Steering Fluid .......................................... 331Windows .................................................. 104

Pressure Cap .............................................. 323Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 40Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 100

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 23

RRadios ........................................................ 210

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 242Care of Your CDs .................................... 242Radio with CD ................................ 214, 220Setting the Time .............................. 211, 212Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 240Understanding Reception ......................... 241

Reading Lamps ........................................... 161

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 36Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 140Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 33Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar® ................................................... 123Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 123Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 123Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 415Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 282Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 90Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 91Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 375Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 373Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 346Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 440General Motors ........................................ 440United States Government ....................... 440

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 85Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 110

452

Right Front Passenger Position,Safety Belts ............................................... 33

RoadsideAssistance Program ................................. 428

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 276Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 417Running the Engine While Parked ............... 122

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 173Pretensioners ............................................. 40Reminder Light ........................................ 173

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 388Driver Position ........................................... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 24Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts ....................................................... 23Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 36Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 33Right Front Passenger Position .................. 33Safety Belt Extender .................................. 40Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4

Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 406Seatback Latches .......................................... 14Seats

Easy Entry Seat ........................................ 15Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual Lumbar ............................................ 9Manual Passenger ....................................... 8Power Seat ................................................. 8Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10Seatback Latches ...................................... 14Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 16

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 60Right Front Seat Position ........................... 63

Security Light .............................................. 184Service ........................................................ 296

Accessories and Modifications .................. 296Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 298California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 297Doing Your Own Work ............................. 297Engine Soon Light ................................... 181Publications Ordering Information ............. 441

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 82Setting the Time ................................. 211, 212Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 391

453

Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 118Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 120Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 150Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 384Installing .................................................. 375Removing ................................................ 373Storing ..................................................... 382

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 400Speedometer ............................................... 172Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 16Starting Your Engine ................................... 110Steering ...................................................... 255Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 240Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 148Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 140Convenience Net ..................................... 141Cupholder(s) ............................................ 140Glove Box ................................................ 140Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 140

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 276Sun Visors .................................................. 104Sunroof ....................................................... 141

TTachometer ................................................. 172Taillamps

Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps .............. 345TCS Warning Light ...................................... 179Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 240Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 105

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 105PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 106PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 107

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 148Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 180Tires ........................................................... 349

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 390Buying New Tires ..................................... 364Chains ..................................................... 370Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 372Cleaning .................................................. 391Compact Spare Tire ................................. 384Different Size ........................................... 366If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 371Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 357

454

Tires (cont.)Inspection and Rotation ............................ 362Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 375Pressure Monitor System ......................... 358Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 375Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 373Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 382Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 350Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 354Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 367Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 368Wheel Replacement ................................. 368When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 364

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 282Towing a Trailer ....................................... 284Your Vehicle ............................................. 282

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 254Control System Warning Light .................. 179

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 317

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 113Trunk .......................................................... 101Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 150Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 149

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 241Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 367Universal Home Remote System ........ 129, 130

Operation ........................................ 131, 136

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 250Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 277Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 203Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders ................................................ 434Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 394Service Parts Identification Label .............. 394

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 168Visors .......................................................... 104

455

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 170Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 195Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 148Other Warning Devices ............................ 148Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 368Different Size ........................................... 366Replacement ............................................ 368

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 51Windows ..................................................... 103

Power ...................................................... 104

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 152Washer Fluid ........................................... 332Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 347Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 390Wiper Fuses ............................................ 395Wipers ..................................................... 151

Winter Driving ............................................. 270

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 238XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 243

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 404

456

2007 chevrolet monte carlo owner manual m€¦ · 2007 chevrolet monte carlo owner manual m 1...

Documents